Asus P5B-E Plus User Manual
Motherboard P5B-E Plus
ii E2851 First Edition V1 September 2006 Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix T ypography .................................................................................................. x P5B-E Plus speciîÂÂcations summary ......................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Lifestyle features ............................................. 1-4 1.3.3 ASUS Special features ................................................... 1-6 1.3.4 ASUS Intelligent Overclocking features .......................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ......................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ................................ 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan .......................... 2-1 1 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations .................................................. 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-17 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-17 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-18 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-18 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-18 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-19 2.5.4 PCI slots ........................................................................ 2-20 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot ....................................................... 2-20
iv Contents 2.5.6 PCI Express x4 slots ..................................................... 2-20 2.5.7 PCI Express x16 slots ................................................... 2-20 2.6 Jumper ........................................................................................ 2-21 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-22 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-22 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-25 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .......................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-4 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-5 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-6 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-9 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ........................................................ 4-10 4.2.2 Menu bar ....................................................................... 4-10 4.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................. 4-10 4.2.4 Menu items .................................................................... 4-1 1 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ........................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.7 Pop-up window .............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.8 Scroll bar ........................................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.9 General help .................................................................. 4-1 1 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-12 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................ 4-12 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-12 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ......................................................... 4-12 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-12 4.3.5 S A T A 1 - 6 . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . 4 - 1 3
v Contents 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration .......................................................... 4-14 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-15 4.3.8 System Information ....................................................... 4-16 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-17 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration ............................................ 4-17 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ......................................................... 4-20 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-21 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-22 4.4.5 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration .................................... 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-26 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-27 4.5.1 Suspend Mode .............................................................. 4-27 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-27 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-27 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-27 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-28 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-29 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-31 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-31 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-32 4.6.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-34 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-36 4.7.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-36 4.7.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle ......................................................... 4-37 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-38 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ................................................. 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 Make disk menu .............................................................. 5-4 5.2.5 Manual menu .................................................................. 5-5 5.2.6 ASUS contact information ............................................... 5-5 5.2.7 Other information ............................................................ 5-6
vi Contents 5.3 Software information ................................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠........................................................... 5-8 5.3.2 PC Probe II ................................................................... 5-10 5.3.3 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................... 5-16 5.3.4 ASUS AI Gear ............................................................... 5-18 5.3.5 ASUS AI Nap ................................................................ 5-19 5.3.6 ASUS AI N.O.S. ............................................................ 5-20 5.3.7 ASUS Q-Fan ................................................................. 5-21 5.3.8 ASUS Ai Booster ........................................................... 5-22 5.3.9 SoundMAX î High DeîÂÂnition Audio utility ....................... 5-23 5 .4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-28 5.4.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions ............................................................ 5-28 5.4.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ..................................... 5-29 5.4.3 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations ............................................. 5-29 5.4.4 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration ........................................ 5-37 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-45 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS .... 5-45 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î ...................... 5-45 Appendix: CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel î SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ....................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements ...................................................... A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ................................................................ A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer â s instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user â s authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer .
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîÂÂguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports. Where to îÂÂnd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îÂÂyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Key s encl osed i n the less- than a nd gre ater-t han s ign mea ns tha t you must p ress the enclo sed ke y. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[î¿lename] afudos /iP5BP.ROM DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) CPU LGA775 socket for Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme / Coreâ¢2 Duo / Pentium î Extreme / Pentium î D / Pentium î 4 / Celeron î D Processors Compatible with Intel î 05B/05A/06 processors Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ready * Refer to www .asus.com for Intel CPU support list Chipset Intel î P965 / ICH8R with Intel î Fast Memory Access T echnology System Bus 1066 / 800 / 533 MHz Memory 4 x DIMM, max. 8GB, DDR2 800 / 667 / 533 MHz, non- ECC, un-buffered memory Dual channel memory architecture * Refer to www .asus.com or user manual for Memory QVL (Qualify Vendor List) Expansion Slots 1 x PCI-E x16 1 x PCI-E x4 1 x PCI-E x1 3 x PCI 2.2 Storage Southbridge - 6 x SA T A 3.0 Gb/s ports - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology supports RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10. JMicron î JMB363 P A T A and SA T A controller - 1 x UltraDMA 133/100/66 for up to 2 P A T A devices - 1 x Internal SA T A 3.0 Gb/s port - 1 x External SA T A 3.0 Gb/s port (SA T A On-the-Go) - Support SA T A RAID 0, 1 and JBOD LAN Marvell î PCI-E Gigabit LAN controller
xii P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary Audio ADI î AD1988A 8-channel High DeîÂÂnition Audio CODEC - Support Jack-Sensing, Enumeration, Multi-streaming and Jack-Retasking - Coaxial / Optical S/PDIF out ports at back I/O - ASUS Noise Filter IEEE 1394 TI î 1394a controller supports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports (one at mid-board; one at back panel) USB 10 x USB 2.0 ports (6 ports at mid-board, 4 ports at back panel) ASUS Lifestyle Unique Features ASUS Quiet Thermal Solution: - ASUS AI Gear - ASUS AI Nap - ASUS Fanless Design: Stack Cool 2 - ASUS Q-Fan 2 ASUS Crystal Sound: - ASUS Noise Filter ASUS EZ DIY : - ASUS Q-Connector - ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle - ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 - ASUS EZ Flash 2 - ASUS Power LED Other Features ASUS MyLogo 2 Multi-language BIOS ASUS Exclusive Overclocking Features Intelligent overclocking tools: - AI NOS⢠(Non-delay Overclocking System) - AI Overclocking (intelligent CPU frequency tuner) - ASUS PEG Link - Automatically performance tuning for graphics card - ASUS AI Booster utility Precision T weaker: - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 6.25mV increment - vDIMM: 13-step DRAM voltage control - vChipset: 4-step Chipset voltage control SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) - FSB tuning from 100MHz up to 650MHz at 1MHz increment - Memory tuning from 533MHz up to 1066MHz - PCI Express frequency tuning from 100MHz up to 150MHz at 1MHz increment Overclocking Protection: - ASUS C.P .R.(CPU Parameter Recall) (continued on the next page)
xiii P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) Internal I/O Connetors 3 x USB connectors support additional 6 USB ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x IDE connector 7 x SA T A connectors 1 x CPU Fan connector 3 x Chassis Fan connector 1 x Power Fan connector 1 x IEEE1394a connector Front panel audio connector 1 x Azalia Digital Header 1 x S/PDIF Out Header Chassis Intrusion connector CD audio in 24-pin A TX Power connector 2 x 4-pin EA TX 12V Power connector System Panel Back Panel I/O Ports 1 x PS/2 Keyboard 1 x PS/2 Mouse 1 x Serial port 1 x S/PDIF Out (Coaxial Optical) 1 x External SA T A 1 x IEEE1394a 1 x RJ45 port 4 x USB 2.0/1.1 8-Channel Audio I/O BIOS 8 Mb Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, WfM2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, ACPI 2.0a, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flash 2, ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 Manageability WfM 2.0, DMI 2.0, WOL by PME, WOR by PME, PXE
xiv P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary Accessories UltraDMA 133/100/66 cable FDD cable SA T A cables SA T A power cables I/O Shield User's manual USB2.0 port module 3 in 1 Q-connector IEEE1394 port module Support CD Contents Drivers ASUS PC Probe II ASUS Update ASUS AI Suite Anti-virus software (OEM version) Form Factor A TX Form Factor , 12âÂÂx 9.6â (30.5cm x 24.4cm) *SpeciîÂÂcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS î P5B-E Plus motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5B-E Plus I/O modules 1 x 1-port IEEE 1394a module 1 x 2-port USB 2.0 module Cables Serial A T A power and signal cable for 6 devices 1 x A T A cable 1 x Floppy disk drive cable Accessories I/O shie ld 1 x ASUS Q-Connector Kit (USB, 1394, system panel; Retail version only) Application CD ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide
1-2 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Green ASUS This motherboard and its packaging comply with the European UnionâÂÂs Restriction on the use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS). This is in line with the ASUS vision of creating environment-friendly and recyclable products/packaging to safeguard consumersâ health while minimizing the impact on the environment. Intel î Coreâ¢2 Processor Ready This motherboard supports the latest Intel î Coreâ¢2 processor in the LGA775 package. With the new Intel î Core⢠microarchitecture technology and 1066 / 800 MHz FSB, Intel î Coreâ¢2 processor is one of the most powerful and energy efîÂÂcient CPU in the world. Intel P965 Chipset The Intel î P965 Express Chipset is the latest chipset designed to support 8GB of dual-channel DDR2 800/677/533 architecture, 1066/800/533 FSB (Front Side Bus), PCI Express x16 graphics and multi-core CPU. It especially includes Intelî Fast Memory Access technology that signiîÂÂcantly optimizes the use of available memory bandwidth and reduces the latency of the memory accesses. DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory that features data transfer rates of 800/667/533 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 12.8 GB/s. Furthermore, this motherboard does not restrict the memory size across two channels. Users may install different memory size DIMMs into the two channels and enjoy dual-channel and single-channel functions at the same time. This new feature optimizes the use of available memory size. See page 2-13 for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-3 Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s technology and SA T A-On-The-Go This motherboard supports the next-generation hard drives based on the Serial A T A (SA T A) 3Gb/s storage speciîÂÂcation, delivering enhanced scalability and doubling the bus bandwidth for high-speed data retrieval and saves. The external SA T A port located at the back I/O provides smart setup and hot-plug functions. Easily backup photos, videos and other entertainment contents to external devices. See pages 2-23, and 2-26 for details. Dual RAID solution The Intel î P965 chipset incorporates six Serial A T A connectors with high performance RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10 functions. The JMicron î controller provides another two Serial A T A connectors for RAID 0, 1, and JBOD functions. Making this motherboard an ideal solution to enhance hard disk performance and data back up protection without the cost of add-on cards. See pages 2-26 to 2-28 for details. IEEE 1394a support The IEEE 1394a interface provides high speed digital interface for audio/video appliances such as digital television, digital video camcorders, storage peripherals & other PC portable devices. See pages 2-22 and 2-29 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready This motherboard provides convenient connectivity to external home theater audio systems via coaxial and optical S/PDIF-out (SONY -PHILIPS Digital Interface) jacks. It allows to transfer digital audio without converting to analog format and keeps the best signal quality . See pages 2-24 and 2-33 for details. High DeîÂÂnition Audio Enjoy high-end sound quality on your PC! The onboard 8-channel HD audio (High DeîÂÂnition Audio, previously codenamed Azalia) CODEC enables high-quality 192KHz/24-bit audio output, jack-sensing feature, retasking functions and multi- streaming technology that simultaneously sends different audio streams to dif ferent destinations. Y ou can now talk to your partners on the headphone while playing multi-channel network games. See pages 2-22 and 2-23 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3.2 ASUS AI Lifestyle features ASUS Quiet Thermal Solution ASUS Quiet Thermal solution makes system more stable and enhances the overclocking capability . AI Gear AI Gear provides four modes that adjust the CPU frequency and Vcore voltage minimizing system noise and power consumption. Y ou can choose the mode that best suits your computing needs. See page 5-18 for details. AI Nap With AI Nap, the system can continue running at minimum power and noise when you are temporarily away . T o wake the system and return to the OS environment, simply click the mouse or press a key . See page 5-19 for details. Fanless Design - Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat these critical components generate. Q-Fan 2 AS US Q-F an2 t ec hno log y in tel lig ent ly a dju sts b ot h C PU fan a nd ch ass is fa n sp eed s a cco rd in g t o s ys te m l oad ing t o ens ure q ui et, co ol an d efî cie nt op era tio n. Se e p age 4-2 3 an d 5 -21 f or de tai ls. ASUS Crystal Sound This feature can enhance speech-centric applications like Skype, online game, video conference and recording. Noise Filter This feature detects repetitive and stationary noises (non-voice signals) like computer fans, air conditioners, and other background noises then eliminates it in the incoming audio stream while recording. See page 5-27 for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-5 ASUS EZ DIY ASUS EZ DIY feature collection provides you easy ways to install computer components, update the BIOS or back up your favorite settings. ASUS Q-Connector ASUS Q-Connector allows you to easily connect or disconnect the chassis front panel cables to the motherboard. This unique module eliminates the trouble of connecting the system panel cables one at a time and avoiding wrong cable connections. See page 2-35 for details. ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle The motherboard features the ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle that allows users to conveniently store or load multiple BIOS settings. The BIOS settings can be stored in the CMOS or a separate îÂÂle, giving users freedom to share and distribute their favorite settings. See page 4-37 for details. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 allows users to restore corrupted BIOS data from a USB îÂÂash disk containing the BIOS îÂÂle. See page 4-8 for details. ASUS EZ Flash 2 EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly BIOS update utility . Simply press the predeîÂÂned hotkey to launch the utility and update the BIOS without entering the OS. Update your BIOS easily without preparing a bootable diskette or using an OS-based îÂÂash utility . See pages 4-5 and 4-36 for details. ASUS Power LED The motherboard comes with a newly designed ASUS Power LED that lights up in two colors to show the system power status. Blue indicates that the system is in sleep/soft-off mode and red indicates that the system is ON. The ASUS Power LED helps remind you to shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. See page 2-1 for details.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3.3 ASUS Special features ASUS MyLogo2⢠This feature allows you to convert your favorite photo into a 256-color boot logo for a more colorful and vivid image on your screen. See page 4-32 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS setup menu helps you conîÂÂgure your system easier and faster . See page 4-12 for details. 1.3.4 ASUS Intelligent Overclocking features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) The patented ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(AI NOSâ¢) technology auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed when needed. Unlike other dynamic overclocking techniques, AI NOS⢠reacts much faster to satisfy your need for speed. See page 4-17 and 5-20 for details. PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance. It allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. See page 4-24 for details. Precision T weaker This feature allows you to îÂÂne tune the CPU/memory voltage and gradually increase the memory Front Side Bus (FSB) and PCI Express frequency at 1MHz increment to achieve maximum system performance. See page 4-18 to 4-19 for details. C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) The C.P . R. fea ture of th e mot herb oard BIOS all ows a utoma tic r e-se ttin g to t he BIOS defau lt setti ngs in case th e syste m hangs due to overc locking . When t he system hangs due to overclocking, C.P .R. eliminates the need to open the system chassis and clear the RTC data. Simply shut down and reboot the system, and the BIOS automatically restores the CPU default setting for each parameter . D ue t o th e ch ip se t be ha vi o r , A C p ow er o ff i s r eq ui re d b ef or e u si n g C .P . R. function.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-6 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumper ........................................................................................ 2-21 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-22
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a newly designed ASUS Power LED that lights up in two colors to show the system power status. Blue indicates that the system is in sleep/soft-off mode and red indicates that the system is ON. The ASUS Power LED helps remind you to shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Onboard LED Sleep/Soft-OFF ON (blue) (red)
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5B-E PLUS î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîÂÂguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îÂÂts into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sur e that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear p art of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-3 2.2.3 Motherboard layout P ANEL P5B-E PLUS î AAFP CHASSIS 24.4cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA_FAN3 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A CD PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 CLRTC Intel î ICH8R EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power Intel î P965 PCI1 USB56 LAN1_USB12 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard USB34 AUDIO PCIEX16_1 PCI2 PC I3 CHA_FAN2 JMicron JMB363 SPDIF_OUT USB910 LGA775 F_ESA TA CHA_FAN1 IE1394_1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 COM1 SA T A5 ADH USB78 SA T A2 SA T A1 SA T A6 SA T A4 SA T A3 EA TX12V SA T A_RAID AD1988 88E8056 PWR_FAN Refer to 2.7 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 Layout contents Slots Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-13 2. PCI slots 2-20 3. PCI Express x 1 slot 2-20 4. PCI Express x4 slot 2-20 5. PCI Express x16 slot 2-20 Jumper Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC) 2-21 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-22 2. Serial portt 2-22 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-22 4. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 2-22 5. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 2-22 6. Line In port (light blue) 2-22 7. Line Out port (lime) 2-22 8. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port 2-22 9. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2, 3 and 4 2-23 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-23 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 2-23 12. External SA T A port 2-23 13. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-24 14. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-24 15. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-5 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-25 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE)) 2-25 3. ICH8R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A2 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], SA T A5 [red], SA T A6 [red]) 2-26 4. JMicron JMB363î Serial A T A RAID connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID) 2-28 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB 78, USB910) 2-29 6. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) 2-29 7. CPU, chassis, power , and chipset fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 2-30 8. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-31 9. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) 2-31 10. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-32 1 1. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-33 12. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF) 2-33 13. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) 2-34
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Coreâ¢2/Pentium î D/Pentium î 4/Pentium î Extreme and Celeron î D processors. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. ⢠Make sure that all power cables are unplugged before installing the CPU. ⢠If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the CHA_F AN1 connector to ensure system stability .
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS CPU Socket 775
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket then îÂÂt the socket alignment key into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. 7. If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the CHA_F AN1 connector to ensure system stability . A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! The motherboard supports Intel î LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). Load plate A B CPU notch
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-9 Fastener Motherboard hole 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î processor , the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . If you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel î -certiîÂÂed multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Y our Intel î LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector . Narrow end of the groove
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5B Deluxe î P5B Deluxe CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM A B
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-11 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan T o uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembl y from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.)
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-13 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîÂÂguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 8 GB system memory when you installed four 2 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠If you install four 1 GB memory modules, the system may detect less than 3 GB of total memory because of address space allocation for other critical functions. This limitation applies to Windows XP 32-bit version operating system since it does not support P AE (Physical Address Extention) mode. ⢠If you install Windows XP 32-bit version operating system, we recommend that you install less than 3GB of total memory . Notes on memory limitations ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot, but only DDR2-533 and DDR2-667 2 GB density modules are available for this conîÂÂguration. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-800/667 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-533. If this happens , contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-800 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-667 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-667 with CL=3 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-533 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . 32-bit 64-bit Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-15 P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-800MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size V endor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821BFP-S5 N/A N/A DS HYMP512U64BP8-S5 V V V 512MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80EA3 V V V 1024MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864A Y -80EA3 V V V 512MB MICRON 5ZD22D9GKX N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80ED4 V V 1024MB MICRON 5ZD22D9GKX N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864A Y - 80ED4 V V 512MB MICRON 6CD22D9GKX N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80ED4 V V V 1024MB MICRON 6CD22D9GKX N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864AY - 80ED4 V V 512MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A SS CM2X512A-6400 V V 1024MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS CM2X1024-6400PRO V V V 1024MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS CM2X1024-6400C4 V V V 512MB A-DA T A N/A N/A N/A SS M2OAD6G3H3160J1E52 V V V 512MB A-DA T A AD29608A8A-25EG N/A N/A SS M20AD6G3H3160I1E5E V 1024MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS BL12864AA804.16F A V V V 512MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E N/A N/A DS 78.91091.420 V P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-667MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size Vendor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS KVR667D2N5/512 V V V 1024MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A DS KVR667D2N5/1G V V 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS KVR667D2E5/512 V V V 256MB KINGSTON HYB18T256800AF3 N/A N/A SS KVR667D2N5/256 V 512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 N/A N/A DS M378T6453FZ0-CE6 V V 512MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC N/A N/A SS M378T6553CZ0-CE6 V 1024MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC N/A N/A DS M378T2953CZ0-CE6 V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-A V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-A V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-A V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160BF-3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-B V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-B V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF3S N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-B V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 V V V 256MB ELPIDA E2508AB-6E-E N/A N/A SS EBE25UC8ABF A-6E-E V V 512MB ELPIDA E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS EBE51UD8AEF A-6E-E V V V 512MB A-DA T A E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS M20EL5G3H3160B1C0Z V V V 512MB A-DA T A AD29608A8B-3EG N/A N/A SS M20AD5Q3H3163J1C52 V V 512MB Transcend E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS TS64MLQ64V6J V V 512MB Transcend J12Q3AB-6 N/A N/A SS JM367Q643A-6 V V
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-533 MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size V endor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 256MB KINGSTON E51 16AF-5C-E N/A N/A SS KVR533D2N4/256 V V V 512MB KINGSTON HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A SS KVR533D2N4/512 V V V 1024MB KINGSTON 5YDIID9GCT N/A N/A DS KVR533D2N4/1G V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AC37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A V V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3.7 N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A V V V 2048MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T1G800AF-3.7 N/A N/A DS HYS64T256020HU-3.7-A V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T5121608BF-3.7 N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-B V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-B V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-B V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U648-C4 V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-C3 V V V 256MB Apacer E51 16AB-5C-E N/A N/A SS 78.81077.420 V 256MB KINGMAX E51 16AB-5C-E N/A N/A SS KLBB68F-36EP4 V 512MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E N/A N/A SS KLBC28F-A8EB4 V V 1024MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E N/A N/A DS KLBD48F-A8EB4 V V V 512MB KINGMAX KKEA88E4AAK-37 N/A N/A SS KLBC28F-A8KE4 V V V 1024MB KINGMAX 5MB22D9DCN N/A N/A DS KLBD48F-A8ME4 V V V 512MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 N/A N/A SS TS64MLQ64V5J V V V 1024MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 N/A N/A DS TS128MLQ64V5J V V SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either Channel A or Channel B as one pair of Dual- channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Su pports four module s insert ed into the yello w and b lack sl ots as two p airs of Dual -channe l memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-800/667/533 MHz QVL.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-17 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlo ck a DIM M so cket by pres sing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1 1
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-19 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ Priority Standard Function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 1 1 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI slot 1 â â â â â used â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared SA T A(363) â shared â â â â â â LAN(8056) â shared â â â â â â PCIE x16 1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 1 â â â â â â â shared USB controller 2 â â â shared â â â â USB controller 3 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 4 shared â â â â â â â USB controller 5 â shared â â â â â â USB 2.0 controller 1 â â â â â â â shared USB 2.0 controller 2 â â shared â â â â â SA T A controller 1 â â shared â â â â â SA T A controller 2 â â â shared â â â â Azalia â â â â â â shared âÂÂ
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The following îÂÂgure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. 2.5.6 PCI Express x4 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x4 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Expression speciîÂÂcations. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. 2.5.7 PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard has one PCI Express x16 slot that support PCI Express x16 graphic cards complying with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. PCI Slot PCI Slot PCIE x16 Slot PCIE x4 Slot PCIE x1 Slot
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-21 2.6 Jumper 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and s ystem setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Reinstall the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. ⢠Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. ⢠Due to the chipset behavior , AC power off is required to enable C.P .R. function. Y ou must turn off and on the power supply or unplug and plug the power cord before reboot the system. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear R TC (Default) 1 2 2 3
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices and other serial devices. 3. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 5. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration.. 6. Line In port (light blue). This port connects the tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 7. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 8. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 1 15 2 3 12 13 14 8 9 4 10 1 1 6 7 5 Activity/Link Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-23 ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that y ou ha ve conn ect ed the Serial A T A signal cable and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the JMicron RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using this connector , set the JMicron Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. The external SA T A port supports external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function. Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out 9. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2, 3 and 4. These 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. External SA T A port . This port connects to an external SA T A box or a Serial A T A port multiplier . This port supports a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s device to conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, RAID 1, or JBOD set through the onboard JMicron SA T A RAID controller.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 13. Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 14. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 15. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. ⢠DO NOT insert a dif ferent connector to this port. ⢠DO NOT unplug the external Serial A T A box when a RAID 0 or JBOD is conîÂÂgured.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-25 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided îÂÂoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâÂÂs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE devices. If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. ICH8R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A2 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], SA T A5 [red], SA T A6 [red]) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 conîÂÂguration with the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology through the onboard Intel î ICH8R RAID controller . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS IDE connector PRI_IDE NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP3 RS AT A_ TXN3 GN D RS AT A_ RX P3 RS AT A_ RX N3 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RX P1 RS AT A_ RX N1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TXP4 RS AT A_ TXN4 GN D RS AT A_ RX P4 RS AT A_ RX N4 GN D SA T A4 SA T A2 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RX P2 RS AT A_ RX N2 GN D SA T A5 GN D RS AT A_ TXP5 RS AT A_ TXN5 GN D RS AT A_ RX P5 RS AT A_ RX N5 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP6 RS AT A_ TXN6 GN D RS AT A_ RX P6 RS AT A_ RX N6 GN D SA T A6 ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the [ConîÂÂgure SA T A as] item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂgurationâ on page 4-14 for details. ⢠For RAID 5, use at least three hard disk drives. For RAID 10, use at least four hard disk drives. Use two to four Serial A T A hard disk drives for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS A T A_T XP3 RS A T A_T XN3 GN D RS A T A_R XP3 RS A T A_R XN3 GN D GN D RS A T A_T XP1 RS A T A_T XN1 GN D RS A T A_R XP1 RS A T A_R XN1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS A T A_T XP4 RS A T A_T XN4 GN D RS A T A_R XP4 RS A T A_R XN4 GN D SA T A4 SA T A2 GN D RS A T A_T XP2 RS A T A_T XN2 GN D RS A T A_R XP2 RS A T A_R XN2 GN D SA T A5 GN D RS A T A_T XP5 RS A T A_T XN5 GN D RS A T A_R XP5 RS A T A_R XN5 GN D GN D RS A T A_T XP6 RS A T A_T XN6 GN D RS A T A_R XP6 RS A T A_R XN6 GN D SA T A6
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-27 C o n n e c t t h e r i g h t - a n g l e s i d e o f S ATA s i g n a l c a b l e t o S ATA dev ice. Or you m ay c onnec t the right-angle side of SA T A cable to th e o nb oar d S A T A po rt to a vo id m e c h a n i c a l c o n f l i c t w i t h h u g e graphics cards. right angle side ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5/RAID 10) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP or later version. ⢠Wh en usin g t he con nec to rs in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1/2/5/6 connector . Refer to the table below for the recommended SA T A hard disk drive connections. Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Color Setting Use SA T A1/2/5/6 Red Master Boot disk SA T A3/4 Black Slave Data Disk
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A RAID connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID) This connector is for a Serial A T A signal cable. This connector supports a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can conîÂÂgure for RAID through the onboard Serial A T A RAID controller . The JMicron î JMB363 controller item in the BIOS is set to [IDE] by default, allowing you to use the connectors to build a RAID set. See section â 4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂguration â for details. Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the JMicron î JMB363 RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A_RAID connector SA T A_RAID GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-29 Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y ou can con nect th e 1394 ca ble to ASUS Q- Connector (1394 , red) îÂÂr st, and then install the Q-Connector (1394) to the 1394 connector onboard. 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB 78, USB910) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 6. IEE E 1394 a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for a IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 USB910 NC GND USB_P10 USB_P10- USB 5V GND USB_P9 USB_P9- USB 5V 1 Y ou can connect the USB cable to ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 7. CPU, chassis, power , and chipset fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN3, 3-pin PWR_F AN) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 3 50 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 7 A (84 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM CHA_F AN3 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V ⢠Only the CPU-F AN and CHA-F AN 1-3 connectors support the ASUS Q- F AN 2 feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labled CHA_F AN1 or CHA_F AN2 for better themal environment.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-31 9. AT X p owe r c on ne cto rs (24-pin A TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. 8. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default , the pin labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and â Groundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default) P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS A TX power connectors EA TXPWR EA TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC Make sure to remove the cap on the EA TX12V connector before connecting an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠DO NOT forget to connect the 8pin EA TX12V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠The A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0-compliant (400W) PSU has been tested to support the motherboard power requirements with the following conîÂÂguration: CPU: Intel î Pentium î Extreme 3.73GHz Memory: 512 MB DDR2 (x4) Graphics card: ASUS EAX1900XT Parallel A T A device: IDE hard disk drive Serial A T A device: SA T A hard disk drive (x2) Optical drive: DVD-RW ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 500W to 600W power or above to ensure the system stability . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition 10. Front panel audio co nne cto r (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deîÂÂnition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâÂÂs high-deîÂÂnition audio capability . ⢠By default, this connector is set to [HD Audio] . If you want to connect a AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel Support T ype item in the BIOS setup to [AC97]. See section 4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂguration for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-33 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground 1 1. Optical drive audio co nne cto r (4-pin CD) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. (black) P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Digital audio connector 5V SPDIFOUT GND SPDIF_OUT 12. Digital audio co nne cto r (4-1 pin SPDIF) This connector is for an additional Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) port(s). Connect the S/PDIF Out module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The S/PDIF module is purchased separately .
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWR) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 13. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-35 Q-Connector (System panel) ASUS Q-Connector allows you to easily to connect the chassis front panel cables to the motherboard. Perform these steps to install ASUS Q-Connector . Step2. Carefully connect the ASUS Q-Connector to the System panel connector . Step1. Connect the front panel cables to their respective connectors on the ASUS Q- Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector for proper connection and pin deîÂÂnition. Step3. When installed, the Q-connector appears as shown. The ASUS Q-Connector îÂÂts only in one orientation; if it doesnâÂÂt îÂÂt, try reversing it.
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5B-E Plus 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you tu rned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. Beep Description Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh T ime error No master drive detected T wo continuous beeps followed by two short beeps Floppy controller failure T wo continuous beeps followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down ... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP or later version: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 ASUS P5B-E Plus 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-9 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-12 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-17 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-27 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-31 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-36 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-38
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS using a îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Recovers the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk, USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-3 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/ S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3ý Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format . A Format 3ý Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start. Windows î 2000 environment T o create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start , then select Run . d. From the Open îÂÂeld, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-5 T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter>. 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk / USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ⢠This function can support devices such as USB îÂÂash disk, or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.00 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: SST 25LF080 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E Plus VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: Main îÂÂlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024KB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> Updating the BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-7 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk, or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Prepare the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk T o recover the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Insert the USB îÂÂash disk that contains BIOS îÂÂle to the USB port. 2. T urn on the system. 3. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Floppy found! Reading î¿le âÂÂP5BP.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start îÂÂashing...
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-9 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted toâÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the SPI chip. The SPI chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu . See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.59 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [Not Detected] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHI FT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. U s e [ ] o r [ - ] t o c o n f ig u r e t h e System Time. 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration T ools For conîÂÂguring options for special functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds Menu items
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Floppy A [1 .4 4 M , 3. 5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 2 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 3 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 4 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 5 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 6 [N ot Det ect ed ] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system time.
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.5 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to select the display language for the BIOS setup screen. ConîÂÂguration options: [Chinese(BIG5)] [Chinese(GB)] [Japanese] [Fran çais] [German] [English] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.59 (C)Copyright 1985-2005, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [Not Detected] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [S HIFT -TAB ] to select a î¿eld. U s e [ ] o r [ - ] t o c o n f i g u r e t h e System Time.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-13 4.3.5 S A T A 1 - 6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of Serial A T A devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each SA T A device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the SA T A device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : WDC WD800JD-00LSA0 Size : 80.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Se le ct t he t yp e o f devic e conne cted t o the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) M [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4]
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A ConîÂÂguration [Enhanced] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] ConîÂÂgure SA T A As [IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the defaul setting [IDE]. IDE Conî¿guration SATA Conî¿guraton [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA as [IDE] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item. Options Disabled Compatiable Enhanced
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-15 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration This menu is the section for AHCI conîÂÂguration. It appears only when you set the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A as from the sub-menu of IDE ConîÂÂguration to [AHCI]. ACHI Port0~5 [XXXX] Displays the status of auto-detection of IDE devices. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main AHCI Settings AHCI Port0 [Not Detected] AHCI Port1 [Not Detected] AHCI Port2 [Not Detected] AHCI Port3 [Not Detected] AHCI Port4 [Not Detected] AHCI Port5 [Not Detected] If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed throuh BIOS. ConîÂÂuration option: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] While entering setup, BIOS auto detects the presence of IDE devices. This displays the status of auto detection of IDE devices. AHCI Port0 Device :Not Detected SATA Port0 [Auto] Sele ct the typ e of device connected to the system SA T A Port0 [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device connected to the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Not Installed]
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.8 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . Select Screen Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main AMIBIOS Version : 0102 Build Date : 09/05/06 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20 GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Available : 512 MB
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-17 BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage AI Tuning [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Jumperfree Conî¿guration LAN Cable Status USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP Adjus t system Frequ ency/Vol tage, etc. AI T uning [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Selct either one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂguration options: Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. Standard Loads the standard settings for the system. AI N.O.S. T h e A S U S N o n - d e l a y O v e r c l o c k i n g S y s t e m f e a t u r e intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks.
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization The following items appear only when you set the AI T uning item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. A vailable DRAM frequency options in various FSB settings * Provided for overclocking purpose only . Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the N.O.S. mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The N.O.S. Mode item appears only when you set the AI T uning item to [AI N.O.S.]. DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz î FSBî ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Auto DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- 533 667 800 889* 1067* FSB 1066 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠FSB 800 ⢠⢠⢠⢠PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . This item is set to [Auto] by default. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [100] [101] ~ [149] [150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] A ll ow s yo u to s yn ch ro ni z e t he P CI f re qu en cy w it h t he P CI E xp re ss o r CP U fr eq ue nc y. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ Auto] [33.33MHz] The DRAM Frequency item also appears when you set the AI T uning item to [AI NOS].
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-19 Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the clock generator spread spectrum. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] The following items also appear when the AI T uning item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.85V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.05V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.25V] [2.30V] [2.35V] [2.40V] [2.45V] Refe r to t he DDR2 docum entatio n befo re adj usti ng the memory volta ge. Set ting a very high memory voltag e may d amage the me mory modul e(s)! CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] [1.2625V] [1.2500V] [1.2375V] [1.2250V] [1.2125V] [1.2000V] [1.1875V] [1.1750V] [1.1625V] [1.1500V] [1.1375V] [1.1250V] [1.1 125V] [1.1000V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.200V] [1.300V] [1.400V] [1.450V] Setting a high FSB termination voltage may damage the chipset and CPU. NB VCore [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.25V] [1.45V] [1.55V] [1.65V] SB Vvore (SA T A,PCIE) [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.60V] [1.70V] [1.80V] ICH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the ICH Chipset V oltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.057V] [1.215V]
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Enables or disables checking of the LAN cable during the Power-On Self-T est (POST). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-21 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the I/O port 60h/64h emulation support. This item should be enabled for the complete USB keyboard legacy support for non-USB aware OSes. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). ConîÂÂguration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Functions [10 USB Ports] Allows you to select the number of USB ports to enable. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] [10 USB Ports] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.0-11.4 USB Devices Enabled: None Legacy USB Support [Auto] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] USB Function [10 USB Ports ] Enables support for legacy USB. AUTO option disables legacy support if no USB devices are connected
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Modify Ratio Support [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears when the item Modify Ratio Support is set to [Enabled] . Ratio CMOS Setting: [13] C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable C1E Support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V anderpool T echnology [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] CPU TM function [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Conî¿gure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0E M anufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.2GHz FSB Speed : 533 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 256 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:24, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 CPUID : F41 Modify Ratio Support [Disabled] C1E Support [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Vanderpool Technology [Enabled] CPU TM function: [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) Tech. [Disabled] S e t s t h e r a t i o between the CPU core c l o c k a n d t h e F S B frequency
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-23 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4.5 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings WARMING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration South Bridge Conî¿guration Configure North Bridge features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced North Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration Memory Remap Feature [Disabled] Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Static Read Control [Auto] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conî¿guration PEG Force x1 [Disabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] North Bridge Chipset ConîÂÂguration ENABLED: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLED: Do not allow remapping of memory Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hyper Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Hyper Threading T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Inter(R) SpeedStep (tm) T ech. [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Automatic]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Memory Remapping Feature [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the remapping of the overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory . Enable this option only when you install 64- bit operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Configure DRAM T iming by SPD [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Static Read Conntrol [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] [Fast] [Faster] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] Allows you to decide which graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI/PEG] [PEG/PCI] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced South Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 Force [Auto] Allows you to manually adjust PCIEX16_2 and PCIEX1_1 conî¿guration. Conî¿guration options: [X2/X1 Mode (comatible)] [X4/disabled Mode (fast)] [Auto] South Bridge Chipset ConîÂÂguration PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 Force [Auto] Allows you to manually adjust PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 conîÂÂguration. ConîÂÂguration options: [X2 Mode (compatible)] [X4 Mode (fast)] [Auto]
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-25 Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] JMicron SA T A/P A T A Controller [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] JMicron SA T A Controller Mode [IDE] ConîÂÂguration options: [RAID] [IDE] [AHCI] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] 4.4.6 OnBoard Devices ConîÂÂguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [IDE] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] E n a b l e o r D i s a b l e High Deî¿nition Audio Controller HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the High DeîÂÂnition Audio Controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support T ype [HD Audio] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or high-deîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to disable or enable the onboard 1394 device support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.7 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . ConîÂÂguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. ConîÂÂguration options: [Y es] [No] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciîÂÂc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] N O : l e t s t h e B I O S c o n f i g u r e a l l t h e devices in the system. YES: lets the operating s ys te m c on f ig ur e P lu g and Play (PnP) devices no t r eq ui re d fo r b oo t i f y o u r s y s t e m h a s a Plug and Play operating system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-27 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. ConîÂÂguration options: [S1 (POS) only] [S3 only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Enabled] SpeciîÂÂes the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) version supported. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration Restore On AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to [Power On], the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to [Last State], the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date/ RTC Alarm Hour/ RTC Alarm Minute/ RTC Alarm Second will become user-conîÂÂgurable with set values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PCIE devices to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power APM Conî¿guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-29 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to disable the Power On by PS/2 keyboard function or set speciîÂÂc keys on the PS/2 keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [50.5úC/122.5úF] MB Temperature [30úC/86úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [3770RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan 1 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 3 Speed [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.328V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.216V] 5V Voltage [ 5.017V] 12V Voltage [11.457V] CPU Temperature CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan ProîÂÂle items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control feature.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan 1/2/3 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the chassis Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis Q-Fan ProîÂÂle items appear when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Q-Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the chassis Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the chassis fan automatically adjusts depending on the chassis temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet chassis fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum chassis fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select [Ignored] if you do not want to detect this item.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-31 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Speciî¿ es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. A v i rt u al f l op py d i sk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [xxx Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxx Drive] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [A TA PI C D- RO M ] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the availabe devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â if Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrea se the tim e need ed to boot the system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-33 Hit âÂÂDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message â Password Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message â Password Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â 2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-35 User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message â Password Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password :Installed User Password :Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîÂÂgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS O.C. Proî¿le Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update BIOS. This utility doesn't support : 1.NTFS format 4.7.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Y es] or [No], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. Please see page 4-5, section 4.1.3 for details. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.00 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: SST 25LF080 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E PLUS VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-37 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status :Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status :Not Installed Save to Proî¿le 1 Load from Proî¿le 1 Save to Proî¿le 2 Load from Proî¿le 2 Start O.C. Proî¿le Save to Proî¿le 1 4.7.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. Save to ProîÂÂe 1/2 Allows you to save the current BIOS îÂÂle to the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to save the îÂÂle. Load from ProîÂÂle 1/2 Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the îÂÂle. Start O.C. ProîÂÂle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility . ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V1.00 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E PLUS VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ⢠This function can support devices such as USB îÂÂash disk or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure!
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.8 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup afte r saving the changes. F10 key can be used fo r this operation. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.3 Software information ................................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-28 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-45
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-1 If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/XP/64-bit XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to display support CD/motherboard information
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll-Drivers Installation Wizard Installs all of the drivers through the Installation Wizard. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î chipset Inf update program. SoundMAX ADI1988 Audio Driver Installs the SoundMAX î ADI1988 audio driver and application. Marvell î Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet driver . JMicron î JMB36X RAID Controller Driver Installs the JMicron î JMB36X Serial A T A RAID controller driver . USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver .
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS InstAll-Installation Wizard for Utilities Install all of the utilities through the Installation Wizard. ASUS AI Suite Install the ASUS AI Suite. ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. Anti-Virus Utility The anti-virus application scans, identiîÂÂes, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Microsoft DirectX 9.0c Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c driver . The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0c is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sound. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of you computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Visit the Microsoft î website (www .microsoft.com) for updates.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.4 Make disk menu The Make Disk menu contains items to create the Intel ICH8 or JMicron î JMB36X RAID/AHCI driver disk. Make Intel ICH8 32/64bit RAID/AHCI Driver Disk Allows you to create an ICH8 32/64bit RAID/AHCI driver disk. Make JMicron î JMB36X 32/64bit RAID/AHCI Driver Allows you to create a JMicron î JMB36X 32/64bit RAID/AHCI driver . ADOBE Acrobat Reader V7.0 Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view , and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Marvell î Y ukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell Y ukon VCT Application.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-5 5.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Mo st user ma nua l î les a re in P ort abl e D ocum ent Fo rma t ( PD F). Ins tal l t he Ad obe î Ac rob at î R ead er f rom th e U til it ies men u b efo re open ing a use r m an ual îÂÂle . 5.2.6 ASUS Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format. 5.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-7 T echnical support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wiza rds that will conveniently guide you through the installation. V iew the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section â 5.2.3 Utilities menu â for details. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section â 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility .â â¢ Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section â 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .â â¢ Y ou can create your own boot logo image in GIF , JPG, or BMP îÂÂle formats. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section â 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility â for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next. 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next . The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the f o ld e r t h a t c o n ta i n s t h e i m a ge y ou intend to use as your boot logo.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.2 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer â s vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Probe II main window allows you to view the current status of your system and change the utility conîÂÂguration. By default, th e main window displays the Preference section. Y ou can close or restore the Preference section by c licking on the triangle on the main window right handle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-1 1 Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the m ain window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Preferences Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Changing the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic ef fect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group , c lick the horsesh oe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer â s desktop. Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the m onitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Y ou cannot adjust the sensor threshold values in a small monitoring panel.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-13 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This b ro ws er displays various Windows î management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser . CPU usage The CPU tab displays real- time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (b lue) and the available HDD space.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-15 Memory usage The Me mory tab sho ws both use d and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available physical ConîÂÂguring PC Probe II Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables y ou to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor thresho ld values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values f or each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch AI Gear , AI N.O.S., AI Booster , AI Nap, and Q-Fan utilities easily . Installing AI Suite T o install AI Suite on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click AI Suite . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching AI Suite Y ou can launch the AI Suite right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the AI Suite from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx.xx . The AI Suite main window appears. After launching the application, the AI Suite icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using AI Suite Click the AI N.O.S., AI Gear , AI Nap, AI Booster , or Q-Fan icon to launch the utility , or click the Normal icon to restore the system to normal state. Press to launch AI Gear Press to launch AI Nap Pres s to la unch AI N.O.S. Press to launch Q-Fan Pr ess to l aun ch A I Bo ost er Press to restore to normal
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-17 Other feature buttons Click on right corner of the main window to open the monitor window . Click on right corner of the expanded window to switch the temperature from degrees Centigrade to degrees Fahrenheit. Displays the CPU/ system temperature, CPU/memory/PCIE voltage, and CPU/ chassis fan speed Displays the FSB/CPU frequency
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.4 ASUS AI Gear ASUS AI Gear provides four system performance options that allows you to select the best performance setting for your computing needs. This easy-to-use utility adjusts the processor frequency and vCore voltage to minimize system noise and power consumption. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch AI Gear by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on your Windows OS taskbar and then click the AI Gear button on the AI Suite main window . Shift the gear to the performance setting that you like. Maximum Performance Medium Performance High Performance Maximum Power Saving
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-19 5.3.5 ASUS AI Nap This feature allows you to minimize the power consumption of your computer whenever you are away . Enable this feature for minimum power consumption and a more quiet system operation. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI Nap button on the AI Suite main window . Click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o exit AI Nap mode, press the system power or mouse button then click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o switch the power button functions from AI Nap to shutting down, just right click the AI Suite icon on the OS taskbar , select AI Nap and click Use power button . Unclick the the item to switch the function back.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.6 ASUS AI N.O.S. This ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI N.O.S. button on the AI Suite main window . drop-down menu button select an N.O.S. mode Click the drop-down menu button and select Disable or Manual. Click Apply at the bottom to save the conîÂÂguration.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-21 5.3.7 ASUS Q-Fan This ASUS Q-Fan Control feature allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan or the Chassis Q-Fan for more efîÂÂcient system operation. After enabling the Q-Fan function, the fans can be set to automatically adjust depending on the temperature, to decrease fan speed, or to achieve the maximum fan speed. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the Q-Fan button on the AI Suite mAIn window . Click the drop-down menu button and display the fan names. Select CPU Q-F AN or CHASSIS Q-F AN . Click the box of Enable Q-Fan to activate this function. drop-down list button Enable Q-Fan box ProîÂÂle list appears after clicking the Enable Q-Fan box. Click the drop-down list button and select a proîÂÂle. Optimal mode makes the fans adjust speed with the temperature; Silent mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation; Performance mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect. click to display the drop-down list and select a Q-Fan mode Click Apply at the bottom to save the setup.
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.8 ASUS AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in WIndows î environment without the hassle of booting the BIOS. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the AI Booster button on the AI Suite main window . The options on the taskbar allow you to use the default settings, adjust CPU/ Memory/PCI-E frequency manually , or create and apply your personal overclocking conîÂÂgurations.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-23 5.3.9 SoundMAX î High DeîÂÂnition Audio utility The ADI AD1988 High DeîÂÂnition Audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability through the SoundMAX î audio utility with AudioESP⢠software to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software implements high quality audio synthesis/rendering, 3D sound positioning, and advanced voice-input technologies. Follow the installation wizard to install the ADI AD1988 Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package to activate the SoundMAX î audio utility . If the SoundMAX î audio utility is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the SoundMAX î icon on the taskbar . ⢠Y ou must use 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel speakers for this setup. ⢠SoundMAX î requires Microsoft î Windows î 2000/XP or later version. Make s ur e t h at o ne o f t h es e o p er at i ng s ys t em s i s i ns ta ll e d b e fo re i ns t al li n g SoundMAX î . ⢠Jack Retas king fu nction works on High Deî nition front panel au dio po rts only .
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundMAX î icon to display the SoundMAX î Control Panel. Audio Setup Wizard B y cl i ck i ng th e i co n f ro m t he So u nd M AX î c on t ro l p an e l, yo u c a n e a si l y conî gure you r a udio set tings. S imply fo llow suc ceeding screen instru ctions a nd begin enjoying High DeîÂÂnition Audio.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-25 Jack conîÂÂguration This screen helps you conîÂÂgure your computer â s audio ports, depending on the audio devices you have installed. Adjust speaker volume This screen helps you adjust speaker volume. Click the T est button to hear the changes you have made. Adjust microphone volume This screen helps you adjust microphone volume. Y ou will be asked to read pre- written text to allow the AudioWizard to adjust the volume as you speak.
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Audio preferences Click the icon to go to the Preferences page. This page allows you to change various audio settings. General options Click the General tab to choose your playback and recording devices, enable/ disable the AudioESP⢠feature, and enable/disable digital output. Listening Environment options Click the Listenin g Enviro nment tab to set up yo ur speaker , acoustic enviro nment, and enable/disable the Virtual Theater Surround function.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-27 Microphone options Click the Microphone tab allows you to optimize your microphone input settings.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with the following RAID resolutions: ⢠Intel î ICH8R Southbridge RAID controller that allow you to conîÂÂgure IDE and Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID 0, 1, 5, 10. ⢠JMicron î RAID controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. 5.4.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conîÂÂgured as a RAID set. This conîÂÂguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver an y advantage over using separ ate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneîÂÂts.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-29 5.4.3 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations T hi s mo th e rb oa rd su pp or t s R A ID 0 , R AI D 1 , J B OD a nd In te l î M at ri x S to ra ge c o n f i g u r a t i o n s f o r S e r i a l ATA h a r d d i s k s d r i v e s t h r o u g h t h e I n t e l î I C H 8 R Southbridge chip. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou mus t se t t he R AID i tem in th e BI OS Se tup bef ore y ou c an cr eat e a RAI D set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE ConîÂÂguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A As, then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RAID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to the system or the motherboard user guide for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5.4.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Intel î Matrix Storage. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH8R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Intel î Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-31 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-33 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 5. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create V olume menu.
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-35 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>.
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size va lues range from 4 KB to 128 K B. The defa ult stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-37 5.4.4 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration The JMicron î Serial A T A controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo SA T A HDDs, preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. A write-enabled îÂÂoppy disk 3. Microsoft î Windows î OS installation disk (Windows 2000/XP) 4. Motherboard support CD with JMB363 driver Complete the following steps before you create a RAID set: 1. Install the external Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs) on your system. 2. Set the JMicron Controller Mode item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. 3. Enter the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility to set up your RAID conîÂÂguration. 4. Create a JMB363 RAID driver disk for Windows î OS installation. See section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5. Install the JMB363 driver after the Windows î OS had been installed. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron SATA Controller Mode [SATA] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or Disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller Always install the JMB363 driver before creating RAID sets.
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Entering the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility 1. During POST , press <Ctrl-J> to enter the JBM363 RAID BIOS menu. J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 Co pyr igh t ( C) 2 00 4-2 005 J Mic ron T ech nol ogy h ttp :/ /ww w. j mic ron .c om HDD0 : HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1 : HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID Press <Ctrl-J> to enter RAID Setup Utility... 2. The main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu appears. 3. Use the arrow keys to move the color bar and navigate through the items. Creating a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Create RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-39 2. When the Level item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set that you want to create. 3. When the Disks item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to highlight an HDD that you want to belong to the RAID set, then press the space bar to conîÂÂrm selection. Repeat the process until the HDDs are selected. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 4. Key in the RAID volume capacity . Use the up/down arrow to choose the block size. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 1-Mirror Disks: Select Disk Block: N/A Size : 159 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 XXX GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 XXX GB Non-RAID [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 5. When done, press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm the creation of the RA ID set. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. 6. The following screen appears, displaying the relevant information about the RAID set you created. [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el N a me R A ID Le ve l Ca pa ci t y S ta tu s M e mb er s( H D D x) RDD0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Available Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [RAID Disk Drive List] [Create New RAID] Name: JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation CONFIRM RAID CREATION ALL DATA ON THE SELECTED HARD DISK WILL BE LOST WHEN EXIT WITH SAVING Create RAID on the selected HDD (Y/N)? Y
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-41 Deleting a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Delete RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the RAID set you want to delete. A selected set shows a sign before it. Press the <Del> key to delete the set. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) R DD 0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving ALL DATA ON THE RAID WILL BE LOST!! ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE (Y/N)? Y [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit
5-42 Chapter 5: Software support Resetting disks to non-RAID T o reset disks to non-RAID: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Revert HDD to non-RAID using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to reset to non-RAID. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDD. An HDD that has been previously conîÂÂgured as part of another RAID set in another platform is called a broken RAID HDD. When you install a broken RAID HDD, you cannot select this HDD when conîÂÂguring a RAID set through the JMB363 utility . If you still want to use this broken RAID HDD as part of the RAID set conîÂÂgured through the JMB363, you may do so by resetting the disk to non-RAID. Y ou will, however , lose all data and previous RAID conîÂÂgurations.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-43 T o solve a Mirror conîÂÂict: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to set as source drive. The selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB R AI D I ns i de HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait... Solving a Mirror conîÂÂict A Mirror conîÂÂict occurs when both disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration are unplugged from the system in turn, then plugged in again. Since both disks contain exactly the same data, the system will be unable to determine which of the two is the source drive. This option allows you to set the source drive and rebuild the Mirror drive according to the contents of the source drive.
5-44 Chapter 5: Software support Saving the settings and exiting setup When you have îÂÂnished, highlight Save & Exit Setup using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter> to save the current RAID conîÂÂguration and exit the J MB363 RAID BOS utility . A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N> to return to the JMB RAID BIOS menu. T o rebuild a Mirror drive: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Rebuild Mirror Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding a Mirror Drive When one of the disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration is unplugged from the system, then plugged in again, a dialogue box appears to ask you to rebuild the Mirror drive. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. This option allows you to rebuild the Mirror drive later and synchronize the data between two hard disks. 2. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB R AI D I ns i de HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait...
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-45 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î : 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support CD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then click Intel ICH8R 32/64 bit RAID Driver Disk to create an Intel î ICH8R RAID driver disk or the Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver to create a JMicron î JMB363 RAID driver disk. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP and later operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS: 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support CD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process.
5-46 Chapter 5: Software support T o install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the <F6> key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Press <F6> then insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, make sure you select Intel(R) 82801GH/GM SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH8R) and JMicron JMB363 . 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
A CPU features The Appendix describ es the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
ASUS P5B-E Plus A-1 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit www .mi cro sof t.c om fo r mo re inf orm atio n o n W ind ows î 64-bit OS. Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . Refe r to t he expa nsion card or add-o n devi ce(s ) docu mentati on, or visit the rela ted we bsite, to ver ify if the ca rd/dev ice suppor ts a 64 -bit s ystem. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠In tel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. T urn on the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu , highlight CPU ConîÂÂguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-23 for details. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Properties window . 8. On the Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On . 9. Click Apply , then click OK . 10. Close the Display Properties window . After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low . The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus A-3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hy per -Thr ead ing Te chn ol ogy is sup por ted und er Win dow s î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www.intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu , make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to [Enabled]. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper- Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-4 Appendix: CPU features
ii E2851 First Edition V1 September 2006 Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe.
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix T ypography .................................................................................................. x P5B-E Plus speciîÂÂcations summary ......................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Lifestyle features ............................................. 1-4 1.3.3 ASUS Special features ................................................... 1-6 1.3.4 ASUS Intelligent Overclocking features .......................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ........................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes .................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ......................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Layout contents ............................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ................................ 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan .......................... 2-1 1 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations .................................................. 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-17 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-17 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-18 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-18 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-18 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-19 2.5.4 PCI slots ........................................................................ 2-20 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot ....................................................... 2-20
iv Contents 2.5.6 PCI Express x4 slots ..................................................... 2-20 2.5.7 PCI Express x16 slots ................................................... 2-20 2.6 Jumper ........................................................................................ 2-21 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-22 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................. 2-22 2.7.2 Internal connectors ....................................................... 2-25 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .......................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function .................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .............................. 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-4 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-5 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-6 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-9 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ........................................................ 4-10 4.2.2 Menu bar ....................................................................... 4-10 4.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................. 4-10 4.2.4 Menu items .................................................................... 4-1 1 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ........................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.7 Pop-up window .............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.8 Scroll bar ........................................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.9 General help .................................................................. 4-1 1 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-12 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................ 4-12 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-12 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ......................................................... 4-12 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-12 4.3.5 S A T A 1 - 6 . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . 4 - 1 3
v Contents 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration .......................................................... 4-14 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-15 4.3.8 System Information ....................................................... 4-16 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-17 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration ............................................ 4-17 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ......................................................... 4-20 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-21 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-22 4.4.5 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂguration .................................... 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-26 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-27 4.5.1 Suspend Mode .............................................................. 4-27 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-27 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-27 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-27 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-28 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-29 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-31 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-31 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-32 4.6.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-34 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-36 4.7.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-36 4.7.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle ......................................................... 4-37 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-38 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ................................................. 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 Make disk menu .............................................................. 5-4 5.2.5 Manual menu .................................................................. 5-5 5.2.6 ASUS contact information ............................................... 5-5 5.2.7 Other information ............................................................ 5-6
vi Contents 5.3 Software information ................................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠........................................................... 5-8 5.3.2 PC Probe II ................................................................... 5-10 5.3.3 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................... 5-16 5.3.4 ASUS AI Gear ............................................................... 5-18 5.3.5 ASUS AI Nap ................................................................ 5-19 5.3.6 ASUS AI N.O.S. ............................................................ 5-20 5.3.7 ASUS Q-Fan ................................................................. 5-21 5.3.8 ASUS Ai Booster ........................................................... 5-22 5.3.9 SoundMAX î High DeîÂÂnition Audio utility ....................... 5-23 5 .4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-28 5.4.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions ............................................................ 5-28 5.4.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ..................................... 5-29 5.4.3 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations ............................................. 5-29 5.4.4 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration ........................................ 5-37 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-45 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS .... 5-45 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î ...................... 5-45 Appendix: CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel î SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ....................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements ...................................................... A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ................................................................ A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer â s instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user â s authority to operate this equipment.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your retailer .
ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conîÂÂguring the motherboard. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports. Where to îÂÂnd more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îÂÂyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Key s encl osed i n the less- than a nd gre ater-t han s ign mea ns tha t you must p ress the enclo sed ke y. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[î¿lename] afudos /iP5BP.ROM DANGER/W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
xi P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) CPU LGA775 socket for Intel î Coreâ¢2 Extreme / Coreâ¢2 Duo / Pentium î Extreme / Pentium î D / Pentium î 4 / Celeron î D Processors Compatible with Intel î 05B/05A/06 processors Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ready * Refer to www .asus.com for Intel CPU support list Chipset Intel î P965 / ICH8R with Intel î Fast Memory Access T echnology System Bus 1066 / 800 / 533 MHz Memory 4 x DIMM, max. 8GB, DDR2 800 / 667 / 533 MHz, non- ECC, un-buffered memory Dual channel memory architecture * Refer to www .asus.com or user manual for Memory QVL (Qualify Vendor List) Expansion Slots 1 x PCI-E x16 1 x PCI-E x4 1 x PCI-E x1 3 x PCI 2.2 Storage Southbridge - 6 x SA T A 3.0 Gb/s ports - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology supports RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10. JMicron î JMB363 P A T A and SA T A controller - 1 x UltraDMA 133/100/66 for up to 2 P A T A devices - 1 x Internal SA T A 3.0 Gb/s port - 1 x External SA T A 3.0 Gb/s port (SA T A On-the-Go) - Support SA T A RAID 0, 1 and JBOD LAN Marvell î PCI-E Gigabit LAN controller
xii P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary Audio ADI î AD1988A 8-channel High DeîÂÂnition Audio CODEC - Support Jack-Sensing, Enumeration, Multi-streaming and Jack-Retasking - Coaxial / Optical S/PDIF out ports at back I/O - ASUS Noise Filter IEEE 1394 TI î 1394a controller supports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports (one at mid-board; one at back panel) USB 10 x USB 2.0 ports (6 ports at mid-board, 4 ports at back panel) ASUS Lifestyle Unique Features ASUS Quiet Thermal Solution: - ASUS AI Gear - ASUS AI Nap - ASUS Fanless Design: Stack Cool 2 - ASUS Q-Fan 2 ASUS Crystal Sound: - ASUS Noise Filter ASUS EZ DIY : - ASUS Q-Connector - ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle - ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 - ASUS EZ Flash 2 - ASUS Power LED Other Features ASUS MyLogo 2 Multi-language BIOS ASUS Exclusive Overclocking Features Intelligent overclocking tools: - AI NOS⢠(Non-delay Overclocking System) - AI Overclocking (intelligent CPU frequency tuner) - ASUS PEG Link - Automatically performance tuning for graphics card - ASUS AI Booster utility Precision T weaker: - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 6.25mV increment - vDIMM: 13-step DRAM voltage control - vChipset: 4-step Chipset voltage control SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) - FSB tuning from 100MHz up to 650MHz at 1MHz increment - Memory tuning from 533MHz up to 1066MHz - PCI Express frequency tuning from 100MHz up to 150MHz at 1MHz increment Overclocking Protection: - ASUS C.P .R.(CPU Parameter Recall) (continued on the next page)
xiii P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) Internal I/O Connetors 3 x USB connectors support additional 6 USB ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x IDE connector 7 x SA T A connectors 1 x CPU Fan connector 3 x Chassis Fan connector 1 x Power Fan connector 1 x IEEE1394a connector Front panel audio connector 1 x Azalia Digital Header 1 x S/PDIF Out Header Chassis Intrusion connector CD audio in 24-pin A TX Power connector 2 x 4-pin EA TX 12V Power connector System Panel Back Panel I/O Ports 1 x PS/2 Keyboard 1 x PS/2 Mouse 1 x Serial port 1 x S/PDIF Out (Coaxial Optical) 1 x External SA T A 1 x IEEE1394a 1 x RJ45 port 4 x USB 2.0/1.1 8-Channel Audio I/O BIOS 8 Mb Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, WfM2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, ACPI 2.0a, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flash 2, ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 Manageability WfM 2.0, DMI 2.0, WOL by PME, WOR by PME, PXE
xiv P5B-E Plus speciî¿cations summary Accessories UltraDMA 133/100/66 cable FDD cable SA T A cables SA T A power cables I/O Shield User's manual USB2.0 port module 3 in 1 Q-connector IEEE1394 port module Support CD Contents Drivers ASUS PC Probe II ASUS Update ASUS AI Suite Anti-virus software (OEM version) Form Factor A TX Form Factor , 12âÂÂx 9.6â (30.5cm x 24.4cm) *SpeciîÂÂcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ......................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................................................ 1-2
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS î P5B-E Plus motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5B-E Plus I/O modules 1 x 1-port IEEE 1394a module 1 x 2-port USB 2.0 module Cables Serial A T A power and signal cable for 6 devices 1 x A T A cable 1 x Floppy disk drive cable Accessories I/O shie ld 1 x ASUS Q-Connector Kit (USB, 1394, system panel; Retail version only) Application CD ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide
1-2 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Green ASUS This motherboard and its packaging comply with the European UnionâÂÂs Restriction on the use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS). This is in line with the ASUS vision of creating environment-friendly and recyclable products/packaging to safeguard consumersâ health while minimizing the impact on the environment. Intel î Coreâ¢2 Processor Ready This motherboard supports the latest Intel î Coreâ¢2 processor in the LGA775 package. With the new Intel î Core⢠microarchitecture technology and 1066 / 800 MHz FSB, Intel î Coreâ¢2 processor is one of the most powerful and energy efîÂÂcient CPU in the world. Intel P965 Chipset The Intel î P965 Express Chipset is the latest chipset designed to support 8GB of dual-channel DDR2 800/677/533 architecture, 1066/800/533 FSB (Front Side Bus), PCI Express x16 graphics and multi-core CPU. It especially includes Intelî Fast Memory Access technology that signiîÂÂcantly optimizes the use of available memory bandwidth and reduces the latency of the memory accesses. DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory that features data transfer rates of 800/667/533 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 12.8 GB/s. Furthermore, this motherboard does not restrict the memory size across two channels. Users may install different memory size DIMMs into the two channels and enjoy dual-channel and single-channel functions at the same time. This new feature optimizes the use of available memory size. See page 2-13 for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-3 Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s technology and SA T A-On-The-Go This motherboard supports the next-generation hard drives based on the Serial A T A (SA T A) 3Gb/s storage speciîÂÂcation, delivering enhanced scalability and doubling the bus bandwidth for high-speed data retrieval and saves. The external SA T A port located at the back I/O provides smart setup and hot-plug functions. Easily backup photos, videos and other entertainment contents to external devices. See pages 2-23, and 2-26 for details. Dual RAID solution The Intel î P965 chipset incorporates six Serial A T A connectors with high performance RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10 functions. The JMicron î controller provides another two Serial A T A connectors for RAID 0, 1, and JBOD functions. Making this motherboard an ideal solution to enhance hard disk performance and data back up protection without the cost of add-on cards. See pages 2-26 to 2-28 for details. IEEE 1394a support The IEEE 1394a interface provides high speed digital interface for audio/video appliances such as digital television, digital video camcorders, storage peripherals & other PC portable devices. See pages 2-22 and 2-29 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready This motherboard provides convenient connectivity to external home theater audio systems via coaxial and optical S/PDIF-out (SONY -PHILIPS Digital Interface) jacks. It allows to transfer digital audio without converting to analog format and keeps the best signal quality . See pages 2-24 and 2-33 for details. High DeîÂÂnition Audio Enjoy high-end sound quality on your PC! The onboard 8-channel HD audio (High DeîÂÂnition Audio, previously codenamed Azalia) CODEC enables high-quality 192KHz/24-bit audio output, jack-sensing feature, retasking functions and multi- streaming technology that simultaneously sends different audio streams to dif ferent destinations. Y ou can now talk to your partners on the headphone while playing multi-channel network games. See pages 2-22 and 2-23 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3.2 ASUS AI Lifestyle features ASUS Quiet Thermal Solution ASUS Quiet Thermal solution makes system more stable and enhances the overclocking capability . AI Gear AI Gear provides four modes that adjust the CPU frequency and Vcore voltage minimizing system noise and power consumption. Y ou can choose the mode that best suits your computing needs. See page 5-18 for details. AI Nap With AI Nap, the system can continue running at minimum power and noise when you are temporarily away . T o wake the system and return to the OS environment, simply click the mouse or press a key . See page 5-19 for details. Fanless Design - Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat these critical components generate. Q-Fan 2 AS US Q-F an2 t ec hno log y in tel lig ent ly a dju sts b ot h C PU fan a nd ch ass is fa n sp eed s a cco rd in g t o s ys te m l oad ing t o ens ure q ui et, co ol an d efî cie nt op era tio n. Se e p age 4-2 3 an d 5 -21 f or de tai ls. ASUS Crystal Sound This feature can enhance speech-centric applications like Skype, online game, video conference and recording. Noise Filter This feature detects repetitive and stationary noises (non-voice signals) like computer fans, air conditioners, and other background noises then eliminates it in the incoming audio stream while recording. See page 5-27 for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 1-5 ASUS EZ DIY ASUS EZ DIY feature collection provides you easy ways to install computer components, update the BIOS or back up your favorite settings. ASUS Q-Connector ASUS Q-Connector allows you to easily connect or disconnect the chassis front panel cables to the motherboard. This unique module eliminates the trouble of connecting the system panel cables one at a time and avoiding wrong cable connections. See page 2-35 for details. ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle The motherboard features the ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle that allows users to conveniently store or load multiple BIOS settings. The BIOS settings can be stored in the CMOS or a separate îÂÂle, giving users freedom to share and distribute their favorite settings. See page 4-37 for details. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 allows users to restore corrupted BIOS data from a USB îÂÂash disk containing the BIOS îÂÂle. See page 4-8 for details. ASUS EZ Flash 2 EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly BIOS update utility . Simply press the predeîÂÂned hotkey to launch the utility and update the BIOS without entering the OS. Update your BIOS easily without preparing a bootable diskette or using an OS-based îÂÂash utility . See pages 4-5 and 4-36 for details. ASUS Power LED The motherboard comes with a newly designed ASUS Power LED that lights up in two colors to show the system power status. Blue indicates that the system is in sleep/soft-off mode and red indicates that the system is ON. The ASUS Power LED helps remind you to shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. See page 2-1 for details.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product Introduction 1.3.3 ASUS Special features ASUS MyLogo2⢠This feature allows you to convert your favorite photo into a 256-color boot logo for a more colorful and vivid image on your screen. See page 4-32 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS setup menu helps you conîÂÂgure your system easier and faster . See page 4-12 for details. 1.3.4 ASUS Intelligent Overclocking features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) The patented ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(AI NOSâ¢) technology auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed when needed. Unlike other dynamic overclocking techniques, AI NOS⢠reacts much faster to satisfy your need for speed. See page 4-17 and 5-20 for details. PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance. It allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system conîÂÂguration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. See page 4-24 for details. Precision T weaker This feature allows you to îÂÂne tune the CPU/memory voltage and gradually increase the memory Front Side Bus (FSB) and PCI Express frequency at 1MHz increment to achieve maximum system performance. See page 4-18 to 4-19 for details. C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) The C.P . R. fea ture of th e mot herb oard BIOS all ows a utoma tic r e-se ttin g to t he BIOS defau lt setti ngs in case th e syste m hangs due to overc locking . When t he system hangs due to overclocking, C.P .R. eliminates the need to open the system chassis and clear the RTC data. Simply shut down and reboot the system, and the BIOS automatically restores the CPU default setting for each parameter . D ue t o th e ch ip se t be ha vi o r , A C p ow er o ff i s r eq ui re d b ef or e u si n g C .P . R. function.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-6 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots .......................................................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumper ........................................................................................ 2-21 2.7 Connectors ................................................................................. 2-22
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a newly designed ASUS Power LED that lights up in two colors to show the system power status. Blue indicates that the system is in sleep/soft-off mode and red indicates that the system is ON. The ASUS Power LED helps remind you to shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Onboard LED Sleep/Soft-OFF ON (blue) (red)
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5B-E PLUS î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conîÂÂguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard îÂÂts into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sur e that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear p art of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-3 2.2.3 Motherboard layout P ANEL P5B-E PLUS î AAFP CHASSIS 24.4cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA_FAN3 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A CD PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 CLRTC Intel î ICH8R EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power Intel î P965 PCI1 USB56 LAN1_USB12 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard USB34 AUDIO PCIEX16_1 PCI2 PC I3 CHA_FAN2 JMicron JMB363 SPDIF_OUT USB910 LGA775 F_ESA TA CHA_FAN1 IE1394_1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 COM1 SA T A5 ADH USB78 SA T A2 SA T A1 SA T A6 SA T A4 SA T A3 EA TX12V SA T A_RAID AD1988 88E8056 PWR_FAN Refer to 2.7 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 Layout contents Slots Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-13 2. PCI slots 2-20 3. PCI Express x 1 slot 2-20 4. PCI Express x4 slot 2-20 5. PCI Express x16 slot 2-20 Jumper Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC) 2-21 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-22 2. Serial portt 2-22 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-22 4. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 2-22 5. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 2-22 6. Line In port (light blue) 2-22 7. Line Out port (lime) 2-22 8. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port 2-22 9. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2, 3 and 4 2-23 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-23 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 2-23 12. External SA T A port 2-23 13. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-24 14. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-24 15. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-5 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-25 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE)) 2-25 3. ICH8R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A2 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], SA T A5 [red], SA T A6 [red]) 2-26 4. JMicron JMB363î Serial A T A RAID connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID) 2-28 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB 78, USB910) 2-29 6. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) 2-29 7. CPU, chassis, power , and chipset fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 2-30 8. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-31 9. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) 2-31 10. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-32 1 1. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-33 12. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF) 2-33 13. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) 2-34
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Coreâ¢2/Pentium î D/Pentium î 4/Pentium î Extreme and Celeron î D processors. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/ incorrect removal of the PnP cap. ⢠Make sure that all power cables are unplugged before installing the CPU. ⢠If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the CHA_F AN1 connector to ensure system stability .
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS CPU Socket 775
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket then îÂÂt the socket alignment key into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. 7. If installing a dual-core CPU, connect the chassis fan cable to the CHA_F AN1 connector to ensure system stability . A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! The motherboard supports Intel î LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). Load plate A B CPU notch
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-9 Fastener Motherboard hole 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î processor , the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . If you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel î -certiîÂÂed multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Y our Intel î LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly . Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector . Narrow end of the groove
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5B Deluxe î P5B Deluxe CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM A B
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-11 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan T o uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembl y from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.)
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-13 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîÂÂguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 8 GB system memory when you installed four 2 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠If you install four 1 GB memory modules, the system may detect less than 3 GB of total memory because of address space allocation for other critical functions. This limitation applies to Windows XP 32-bit version operating system since it does not support P AE (Physical Address Extention) mode. ⢠If you install Windows XP 32-bit version operating system, we recommend that you install less than 3GB of total memory . Notes on memory limitations ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot, but only DDR2-533 and DDR2-667 2 GB density modules are available for this conîÂÂguration. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-800/667 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-533. If this happens , contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-800 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-667 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-667 with CL=3 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-533 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . 32-bit 64-bit Windows 2000 Advanced Server Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-15 P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-800MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size V endor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 1024MB Hynix HY5PS12821BFP-S5 N/A N/A DS HYMP512U64BP8-S5 V V V 512MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80EA3 V V V 1024MB MICRON 5JAIIZ9DQQ N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864A Y -80EA3 V V V 512MB MICRON 5ZD22D9GKX N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80ED4 V V 1024MB MICRON 5ZD22D9GKX N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864A Y - 80ED4 V V 512MB MICRON 6CD22D9GKX N/A N/A SS MT8HTF6464A Y -80ED4 V V V 1024MB MICRON 6CD22D9GKX N/A N/A DS MT16HTF12864AY - 80ED4 V V 512MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A SS CM2X512A-6400 V V 1024MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS CM2X1024-6400PRO V V V 1024MB CORSAIR Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS CM2X1024-6400C4 V V V 512MB A-DA T A N/A N/A N/A SS M2OAD6G3H3160J1E52 V V V 512MB A-DA T A AD29608A8A-25EG N/A N/A SS M20AD6G3H3160I1E5E V 1024MB Crucial Heat-Sink Package N/A N/A DS BL12864AA804.16F A V V V 512MB Apacer E2508AB-GE-E N/A N/A DS 78.91091.420 V P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-667MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size Vendor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS KVR667D2N5/512 V V V 1024MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A DS KVR667D2N5/1G V V 512MB KINGSTON E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS KVR667D2E5/512 V V V 256MB KINGSTON HYB18T256800AF3 N/A N/A SS KVR667D2N5/256 V 512MB SAMSUNG K4T56083QF-ZCE6 N/A N/A DS M378T6453FZ0-CE6 V V 512MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC N/A N/A SS M378T6553CZ0-CE6 V 1024MB SAMSUNG ZCE6K4T51083QC N/A N/A DS M378T2953CZ0-CE6 V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-A V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-A V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF3S N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-A V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160BF-3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3S-B V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF3S N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3S-B V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF3S N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3S-B V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 V V V 256MB ELPIDA E2508AB-6E-E N/A N/A SS EBE25UC8ABF A-6E-E V V 512MB ELPIDA E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS EBE51UD8AEF A-6E-E V V V 512MB A-DA T A E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS M20EL5G3H3160B1C0Z V V V 512MB A-DA T A AD29608A8B-3EG N/A N/A SS M20AD5Q3H3163J1C52 V V 512MB Transcend E5108AE-6E-E N/A N/A SS TS64MLQ64V6J V V 512MB Transcend J12Q3AB-6 N/A N/A SS JM367Q643A-6 V V
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information P5B-E Plus Series Motherboard QualiîÂÂed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR2-533 MHz capability QualiîÂÂed V endors List (QVL) Standard table for user manual Size V endor Chip No. CL Chip Brand SS/ DS Part No. DIMM support A* B* C* 256MB KINGSTON E51 16AF-5C-E N/A N/A SS KVR533D2N4/256 V V V 512MB KINGSTON HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A SS KVR533D2N4/512 V V V 1024MB KINGSTON 5YDIID9GCT N/A N/A DS KVR533D2N4/1G V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AC37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A V V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512160AF-3.7 N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A V V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800AF37 N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A V V V 2048MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T1G800AF-3.7 N/A N/A DS HYS64T256020HU-3.7-A V V 256MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T5121608BF-3.7 N/A N/A SS HYS64T32000HU-3.7-B V V 512MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 N/A N/A SS HYS64T64000HU-3.7-B V V V 1024MB InîÂÂneon HYB18T512800BF37 N/A N/A DS HYS64T128020HU-3.7-B V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821F-C4 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U648-C4 V V V 512MB Hynix HY5PS12821AFP-C3 N/A N/A SS HYMP564U64AP8-C3 V V V 256MB Apacer E51 16AB-5C-E N/A N/A SS 78.81077.420 V 256MB KINGMAX E51 16AB-5C-E N/A N/A SS KLBB68F-36EP4 V 512MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E N/A N/A SS KLBC28F-A8EB4 V V 1024MB KINGMAX E5108AE-5C-E N/A N/A DS KLBD48F-A8EB4 V V V 512MB KINGMAX KKEA88E4AAK-37 N/A N/A SS KLBC28F-A8KE4 V V V 1024MB KINGMAX 5MB22D9DCN N/A N/A DS KLBD48F-A8ME4 V V V 512MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 N/A N/A SS TS64MLQ64V5J V V V 1024MB Transcend K4T51083QB-GCD5 N/A N/A DS TS128MLQ64V5J V V SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory conîÂÂguration. B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either Channel A or Channel B as one pair of Dual- channel memory conîÂÂguration. C - Su pports four module s insert ed into the yello w and b lack sl ots as two p airs of Dual -channe l memory conîÂÂguration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-800/667/533 MHz QVL.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-17 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlo ck a DIM M so cket by pres sing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. Do not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1 1
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-19 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ Priority Standard Function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 1 1 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI slot 1 â â â â â used â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared SA T A(363) â shared â â â â â â LAN(8056) â shared â â â â â â PCIE x16 1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x16 2 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 1 â â â â â â â shared USB controller 2 â â â shared â â â â USB controller 3 â â shared â â â â â USB controller 4 shared â â â â â â â USB controller 5 â shared â â â â â â USB 2.0 controller 1 â â â â â â â shared USB 2.0 controller 2 â â shared â â â â â SA T A controller 1 â â shared â â â â â SA T A controller 2 â â â shared â â â â Azalia â â â â â â shared âÂÂ
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîÂÂcations. The îÂÂgure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.5 PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. The following îÂÂgure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. 2.5.6 PCI Express x4 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x4 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Expression speciîÂÂcations. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. 2.5.7 PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard has one PCI Express x16 slot that support PCI Express x16 graphic cards complying with the PCI Express speciîÂÂcations. Refer to the îÂÂgure below for the location of the slot. PCI Slot PCI Slot PCIE x16 Slot PCIE x4 Slot PCIE x1 Slot
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-21 2.6 Jumper 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and s ystem setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Reinstall the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. ⢠Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. ⢠Due to the chipset behavior , AC power off is required to enable C.P .R. function. Y ou must turn off and on the power supply or unplug and plug the power cord before reboot the system. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear R TC (Default) 1 2 2 3
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices and other serial devices. 3. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 5. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration.. 6. Line In port (light blue). This port connects the tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 7. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 8. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 1 15 2 3 12 13 14 8 9 4 10 1 1 6 7 5 Activity/Link Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-23 ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that y ou ha ve conn ect ed the Serial A T A signal cable and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the JMicron RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using this connector , set the JMicron Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. The external SA T A port supports external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function. Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out 9. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2, 3 and 4. These 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. External SA T A port . This port connects to an external SA T A box or a Serial A T A port multiplier . This port supports a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s device to conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, RAID 1, or JBOD set through the onboard JMicron SA T A RAID controller.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 13. Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 14. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 15. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. ⢠DO NOT insert a dif ferent connector to this port. ⢠DO NOT unplug the external Serial A T A box when a RAID 0 or JBOD is conîÂÂgured.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-25 2.7.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided îÂÂoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâÂÂs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE devices. If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. ICH8R Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1 [red], SA T A2 [red], SA T A3 [black], SA T A4 [black], SA T A5 [red], SA T A6 [red]) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 conîÂÂguration with the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology through the onboard Intel î ICH8R RAID controller . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS IDE connector PRI_IDE NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TXP3 RS AT A_ TXN3 GN D RS AT A_ RX P3 RS AT A_ RX N3 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RX P1 RS AT A_ RX N1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TXP4 RS AT A_ TXN4 GN D RS AT A_ RX P4 RS AT A_ RX N4 GN D SA T A4 SA T A2 GN D RS AT A_ TXP2 RS AT A_ TXN2 GN D RS AT A_ RX P2 RS AT A_ RX N2 GN D SA T A5 GN D RS AT A_ TXP5 RS AT A_ TXN5 GN D RS AT A_ RX P5 RS AT A_ RX N5 GN D GN D RS AT A_ TXP6 RS AT A_ TXN6 GN D RS AT A_ RX P6 RS AT A_ RX N6 GN D SA T A6 ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the [ConîÂÂgure SA T A as] item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂgurationâ on page 4-14 for details. ⢠For RAID 5, use at least three hard disk drives. For RAID 10, use at least four hard disk drives. Use two to four Serial A T A hard disk drives for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A connectors SA T A1 GN D RS A T A_T XP3 RS A T A_T XN3 GN D RS A T A_R XP3 RS A T A_R XN3 GN D GN D RS A T A_T XP1 RS A T A_T XN1 GN D RS A T A_R XP1 RS A T A_R XN1 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS A T A_T XP4 RS A T A_T XN4 GN D RS A T A_R XP4 RS A T A_R XN4 GN D SA T A4 SA T A2 GN D RS A T A_T XP2 RS A T A_T XN2 GN D RS A T A_R XP2 RS A T A_R XN2 GN D SA T A5 GN D RS A T A_T XP5 RS A T A_T XN5 GN D RS A T A_R XP5 RS A T A_R XN5 GN D GN D RS A T A_T XP6 RS A T A_T XN6 GN D RS A T A_R XP6 RS A T A_R XN6 GN D SA T A6
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-27 C o n n e c t t h e r i g h t - a n g l e s i d e o f S ATA s i g n a l c a b l e t o S ATA dev ice. Or you m ay c onnec t the right-angle side of SA T A cable to th e o nb oar d S A T A po rt to a vo id m e c h a n i c a l c o n f l i c t w i t h h u g e graphics cards. right angle side ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5/RAID 10) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP or later version. ⢠Wh en usin g t he con nec to rs in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1/2/5/6 connector . Refer to the table below for the recommended SA T A hard disk drive connections. Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Color Setting Use SA T A1/2/5/6 Red Master Boot disk SA T A3/4 Black Slave Data Disk
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. JMicron î JMB363 Serial A T A RAID connector (7-pin SA T A_RAID) This connector is for a Serial A T A signal cable. This connector supports a Serial A T A hard disk drive that you can conîÂÂgure for RAID through the onboard Serial A T A RAID controller . The JMicron î JMB363 controller item in the BIOS is set to [IDE] by default, allowing you to use the connectors to build a RAID set. See section â 4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂguration â for details. Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the JMicron î JMB363 RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS SA T A_RAID connector SA T A_RAID GN D RS AT A_ TXP1 RS AT A_ TXN1 GN D RS AT A_ RXP1 RS AT A_ RXN1 GN D
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-29 Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y ou can con nect th e 1394 ca ble to ASUS Q- Connector (1394 , red) îÂÂr st, and then install the Q-Connector (1394) to the 1394 connector onboard. 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB 78, USB910) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 6. IEE E 1394 a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for a IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 USB910 NC GND USB_P10 USB_P10- USB 5V GND USB_P9 USB_P9- USB 5V 1 Y ou can connect the USB cable to ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 7. CPU, chassis, power , and chipset fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_F AN2, 3-pin CHA_F AN3, 3-pin PWR_F AN) The fan c onnect ors su pport cooli ng fan s of 3 50 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 7 A (84 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM CHA_F AN3 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V ⢠Only the CPU-F AN and CHA-F AN 1-3 connectors support the ASUS Q- F AN 2 feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labled CHA_F AN1 or CHA_F AN2 for better themal environment.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-31 9. AT X p owe r c on ne cto rs (24-pin A TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. 8. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default , the pin labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and â Groundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default) P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS A TX power connectors EA TXPWR EA TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC Make sure to remove the cap on the EA TX12V connector before connecting an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠DO NOT forget to connect the 8pin EA TX12V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠The A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0-compliant (400W) PSU has been tested to support the motherboard power requirements with the following conîÂÂguration: CPU: Intel î Pentium î Extreme 3.73GHz Memory: 512 MB DDR2 (x4) Graphics card: ASUS EAX1900XT Parallel A T A device: IDE hard disk drive Serial A T A device: SA T A hard disk drive (x2) Optical drive: DVD-RW ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 500W to 600W power or above to ensure the system stability . P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition 10. Front panel audio co nne cto r (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deîÂÂnition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâÂÂs high-deîÂÂnition audio capability . ⢠By default, this connector is set to [HD Audio] . If you want to connect a AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel Support T ype item in the BIOS setup to [AC97]. See section 4.4.6 Onboard Device ConîÂÂguration for details.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-33 P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground 1 1. Optical drive audio co nne cto r (4-pin CD) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. (black) P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS Digital audio connector 5V SPDIFOUT GND SPDIF_OUT 12. Digital audio co nne cto r (4-1 pin SPDIF) This connector is for an additional Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) port(s). Connect the S/PDIF Out module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The S/PDIF module is purchased separately .
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWR) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 13. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. P5B-E PLUS î P5B-E PLUS System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
ASUS P5B-E Plus 2-35 Q-Connector (System panel) ASUS Q-Connector allows you to easily to connect the chassis front panel cables to the motherboard. Perform these steps to install ASUS Q-Connector . Step2. Carefully connect the ASUS Q-Connector to the System panel connector . Step1. Connect the front panel cables to their respective connectors on the ASUS Q- Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector for proper connection and pin deîÂÂnition. Step3. When installed, the Q-connector appears as shown. The ASUS Q-Connector îÂÂts only in one orientation; if it doesnâÂÂt îÂÂt, try reversing it.
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the îÂÂrst time ........................................................ 3-1 3.2 T urning off the computer ............................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5B-E Plus 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you tu rned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. Beep Description Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh T ime error No master drive detected T wo continuous beeps followed by two short beeps Floppy controller failure T wo continuous beeps followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Turning off the computer 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down ... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP or later version: 1. Click the Start button then select T urn Off Computer . 2. Click the T urn Off button to shut down the computer . 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 ASUS P5B-E Plus 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................... 4-9 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-12 4.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-17 4.5 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-27 4.6 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-31 4.7 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-36 4.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-38
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS using a îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Recovers the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk, USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-3 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/ S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3ý Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format . A Format 3ý Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start. Windows î 2000 environment T o create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start , then select Run . d. From the Open îÂÂeld, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-5 T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter>. 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk / USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ⢠This function can support devices such as USB îÂÂash disk, or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.00 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: SST 25LF080 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E Plus VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: Main îÂÂlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024KB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> Updating the BIOS îÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-7 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> A:\>afudos /iP5BP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk, or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Prepare the motherboard support CD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Recovering the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk T o recover the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Insert the USB îÂÂash disk that contains BIOS îÂÂle to the USB port. 2. T urn on the system. 3. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Floppy found! Reading î¿le âÂÂP5BP.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start îÂÂashing...
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-9 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted toâÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the SPI chip. The SPI chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu . See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.59 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [Not Detected] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHI FT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. U s e [ ] o r [ - ] t o c o n f ig u r e t h e System Time. 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration T ools For conîÂÂguring options for special functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds Menu items
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Floppy A [1 .4 4 M , 3. 5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 2 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 3 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 4 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 5 [N ot Det ect ed ] SATA 6 [N ot Det ect ed ] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system time.
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.5 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to select the display language for the BIOS setup screen. ConîÂÂguration options: [Chinese(BIG5)] [Chinese(GB)] [Japanese] [Fran çais] [German] [English] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.59 (C)Copyright 1985-2005, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Fri 09/08/2006] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Language [English] SATA 1 [Not Detected] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [S HIFT -TAB ] to select a î¿eld. U s e [ ] o r [ - ] t o c o n f i g u r e t h e System Time.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-13 4.3.5 S A T A 1 - 6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of Serial A T A devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each SA T A device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the SA T A device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : WDC WD800JD-00LSA0 Size : 80.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Se le ct t he t yp e o f devic e conne cted t o the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) M [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4]
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A ConîÂÂguration [Enhanced] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] ConîÂÂgure SA T A As [IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the defaul setting [IDE]. IDE Conî¿guration SATA Conî¿guraton [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA as [IDE] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] 4.3.6 IDE ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item. Options Disabled Compatiable Enhanced
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-15 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration This menu is the section for AHCI conîÂÂguration. It appears only when you set the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A as from the sub-menu of IDE ConîÂÂguration to [AHCI]. ACHI Port0~5 [XXXX] Displays the status of auto-detection of IDE devices. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main AHCI Settings AHCI Port0 [Not Detected] AHCI Port1 [Not Detected] AHCI Port2 [Not Detected] AHCI Port3 [Not Detected] AHCI Port4 [Not Detected] AHCI Port5 [Not Detected] If yo u w ant t he Se ria l AT A h ard di sk d riv es to u se the Ad va nc ed Hos t C on tro lle r In ter fac e ( AH CI ), set t hi s i tem to [ AH CI] . Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed throuh BIOS. ConîÂÂuration option: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] While entering setup, BIOS auto detects the presence of IDE devices. This displays the status of auto detection of IDE devices. AHCI Port0 Device :Not Detected SATA Port0 [Auto] Sele ct the typ e of device connected to the system SA T A Port0 [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device connected to the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Not Installed]
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.8 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . Select Screen Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main AMIBIOS Version : 0102 Build Date : 09/05/06 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20 GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Available : 512 MB
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-17 BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. 4.4.1 JumperFree ConîÂÂguration T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage AI Tuning [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Jumperfree Conî¿guration LAN Cable Status USB Conî¿guration CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP Adjus t system Frequ ency/Vol tage, etc. AI T uning [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Selct either one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂguration options: Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. Standard Loads the standard settings for the system. AI N.O.S. T h e A S U S N o n - d e l a y O v e r c l o c k i n g S y s t e m f e a t u r e intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks.
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization The following items appear only when you set the AI T uning item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. A vailable DRAM frequency options in various FSB settings * Provided for overclocking purpose only . Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the N.O.S. mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The N.O.S. Mode item appears only when you set the AI T uning item to [AI N.O.S.]. DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz î FSBî ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Auto DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- DDR2- 533 667 800 889* 1067* FSB 1066 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠FSB 800 ⢠⢠⢠⢠PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . This item is set to [Auto] by default. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [100] [101] ~ [149] [150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] A ll ow s yo u to s yn ch ro ni z e t he P CI f re qu en cy w it h t he P CI E xp re ss o r CP U fr eq ue nc y. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [ Auto] [33.33MHz] The DRAM Frequency item also appears when you set the AI T uning item to [AI NOS].
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-19 Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the clock generator spread spectrum. C on îÂÂg ur at io n op ti on s: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] The following items also appear when the AI T uning item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.85V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.05V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.25V] [2.30V] [2.35V] [2.40V] [2.45V] Refe r to t he DDR2 docum entatio n befo re adj usti ng the memory volta ge. Set ting a very high memory voltag e may d amage the me mory modul e(s)! CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] [1.2625V] [1.2500V] [1.2375V] [1.2250V] [1.2125V] [1.2000V] [1.1875V] [1.1750V] [1.1625V] [1.1500V] [1.1375V] [1.1250V] [1.1 125V] [1.1000V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.200V] [1.300V] [1.400V] [1.450V] Setting a high FSB termination voltage may damage the chipset and CPU. NB VCore [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.25V] [1.45V] [1.55V] [1.65V] SB Vvore (SA T A,PCIE) [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.60V] [1.70V] [1.80V] ICH Chipset V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select the ICH Chipset V oltage. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1.057V] [1.215V]
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Enables or disables checking of the LAN cable during the Power-On Self-T est (POST). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-21 4.4.3 USB ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the I/O port 60h/64h emulation support. This item should be enabled for the complete USB keyboard legacy support for non-USB aware OSes. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). ConîÂÂguration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Functions [10 USB Ports] Allows you to select the number of USB ports to enable. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] [10 USB Ports] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.0-11.4 USB Devices Enabled: None Legacy USB Support [Auto] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] USB Function [10 USB Ports ] Enables support for legacy USB. AUTO option disables legacy support if no USB devices are connected
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4.4 CPU ConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Modify Ratio Support [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears when the item Modify Ratio Support is set to [Enabled] . Ratio CMOS Setting: [13] C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable C1E Support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V anderpool T echnology [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] CPU TM function [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Conî¿gure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0E M anufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.2GHz FSB Speed : 533 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 256 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:24, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 CPUID : F41 Modify Ratio Support [Disabled] C1E Support [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Vanderpool Technology [Enabled] CPU TM function: [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) Tech. [Disabled] S e t s t h e r a t i o between the CPU core c l o c k a n d t h e F S B frequency
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-23 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 4.4.5 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings WARMING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration South Bridge Conî¿guration Configure North Bridge features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced North Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration Memory Remap Feature [Disabled] Conî¿gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Static Read Control [Auto] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conî¿guration PEG Force x1 [Disabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] North Bridge Chipset ConîÂÂguration ENABLED: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLED: Do not allow remapping of memory Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hyper Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Hyper Threading T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Inter(R) SpeedStep (tm) T ech. [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Automatic]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Memory Remapping Feature [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the remapping of the overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory . Enable this option only when you install 64- bit operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Configure DRAM T iming by SPD [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Static Read Conntrol [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] [Fast] [Faster] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] Allows you to decide which graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI/PEG] [PEG/PCI] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced South Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 Force [Auto] Allows you to manually adjust PCIEX16_2 and PCIEX1_1 conî¿guration. Conî¿guration options: [X2/X1 Mode (comatible)] [X4/disabled Mode (fast)] [Auto] South Bridge Chipset ConîÂÂguration PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 Force [Auto] Allows you to manually adjust PCIEX16_2/PCIEX1_1 conîÂÂguration. ConîÂÂguration options: [X2 Mode (compatible)] [X4 Mode (fast)] [Auto]
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-25 Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] JMicron SA T A/P A T A Controller [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] JMicron SA T A Controller Mode [IDE] ConîÂÂguration options: [RAID] [IDE] [AHCI] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] 4.4.6 OnBoard Devices ConîÂÂguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN_1 [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron Controller Mode [IDE] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] E n a b l e o r D i s a b l e High Deî¿nition Audio Controller HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the High DeîÂÂnition Audio Controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support T ype [HD Audio] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or high-deîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to disable or enable the onboard 1394 device support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.7 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . ConîÂÂguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. ConîÂÂguration options: [Y es] [No] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciîÂÂc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] N O : l e t s t h e B I O S c o n f i g u r e a l l t h e devices in the system. YES: lets the operating s ys te m c on f ig ur e P lu g and Play (PnP) devices no t r eq ui re d fo r b oo t i f y o u r s y s t e m h a s a Plug and Play operating system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-27 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. ConîÂÂguration options: [S1 (POS) only] [S3 only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Enabled] SpeciîÂÂes the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) version supported. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 APM ConîÂÂguration Restore On AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to [Power On], the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to [Last State], the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date/ RTC Alarm Hour/ RTC Alarm Minute/ RTC Alarm Second will become user-conîÂÂgurable with set values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PCIE devices to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power APM Conî¿guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-29 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to disable the Power On by PS/2 keyboard function or set speciîÂÂc keys on the PS/2 keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [50.5úC/122.5úF] MB Temperature [30úC/86úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [3770RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan 1 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 3 Speed [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.328V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.216V] 5V Voltage [ 5.017V] 12V Voltage [11.457V] CPU Temperature CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan ProîÂÂle items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control feature.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan 1/2/3 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the chassis Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis Q-Fan ProîÂÂle items appear when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Q-Fan ProîÂÂle [Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the chassis Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the chassis fan automatically adjusts depending on the chassis temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet chassis fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum chassis fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows N/A. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select [Ignored] if you do not want to detect this item.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-31 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Speciî¿ es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. A v i rt u al f l op py d i sk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [xxx Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [xxx Drive] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [A TA PI C D- RO M ] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the availabe devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â if Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrea se the tim e need ed to boot the system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-33 Hit âÂÂDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message â Password Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message â Password Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â 2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-35 User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message â Password Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password :Installed User Password :Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîÂÂgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS O.C. Proî¿le Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update BIOS. This utility doesn't support : 1.NTFS format 4.7.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Y es] or [No], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. Please see page 4-5, section 4.1.3 for details. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.00 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: SST 25LF080 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E PLUS VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
ASUS P5B-E Plus 4-37 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status :Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status :Not Installed Save to Proî¿le 1 Load from Proî¿le 1 Save to Proî¿le 2 Load from Proî¿le 2 Start O.C. Proî¿le Save to Proî¿le 1 4.7.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. Save to ProîÂÂe 1/2 Allows you to save the current BIOS îÂÂle to the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to save the îÂÂle. Load from ProîÂÂle 1/2 Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the îÂÂle. Start O.C. ProîÂÂle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility . ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V1.00 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5B-E PLUS VER: 0102 DATE: 09/05/06 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ⢠This function can support devices such as USB îÂÂash disk or îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure!
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.8 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup afte r saving the changes. F10 key can be used fo r this operation. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ................................................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information .............................................................. 5-1 5.3 Software information ................................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID conîÂÂgurations .................................................................. 5-28 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ....................................................... 5-45
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-1 If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/XP/64-bit XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to display support CD/motherboard information
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll-Drivers Installation Wizard Installs all of the drivers through the Installation Wizard. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î chipset Inf update program. SoundMAX ADI1988 Audio Driver Installs the SoundMAX î ADI1988 audio driver and application. Marvell î Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell Y ukon Gigabit Ethernet driver . JMicron î JMB36X RAID Controller Driver Installs the JMicron î JMB36X Serial A T A RAID controller driver . USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver .
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS InstAll-Installation Wizard for Utilities Install all of the utilities through the Installation Wizard. ASUS AI Suite Install the ASUS AI Suite. ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. Anti-Virus Utility The anti-virus application scans, identiîÂÂes, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Microsoft DirectX 9.0c Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c driver . The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0c is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sound. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of you computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Visit the Microsoft î website (www .microsoft.com) for updates.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.4 Make disk menu The Make Disk menu contains items to create the Intel ICH8 or JMicron î JMB36X RAID/AHCI driver disk. Make Intel ICH8 32/64bit RAID/AHCI Driver Disk Allows you to create an ICH8 32/64bit RAID/AHCI driver disk. Make JMicron î JMB36X 32/64bit RAID/AHCI Driver Allows you to create a JMicron î JMB36X 32/64bit RAID/AHCI driver . ADOBE Acrobat Reader V7.0 Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view , and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Marvell î Y ukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell Y ukon VCT Application.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-5 5.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Mo st user ma nua l î les a re in P ort abl e D ocum ent Fo rma t ( PD F). Ins tal l t he Ad obe î Ac rob at î R ead er f rom th e U til it ies men u b efo re open ing a use r m an ual îÂÂle . 5.2.6 ASUS Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format. 5.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-7 T echnical support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wiza rds that will conveniently guide you through the installation. V iew the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section â 5.2.3 Utilities menu â for details. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section â 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility .â â¢ Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section â 4.6.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .â â¢ Y ou can create your own boot logo image in GIF , JPG, or BMP îÂÂle formats. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section â 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility â for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next. 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next . The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the f o ld e r t h a t c o n ta i n s t h e i m a ge y ou intend to use as your boot logo.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.2 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer â s vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Probe II main window allows you to view the current status of your system and change the utility conîÂÂguration. By default, th e main window displays the Preference section. Y ou can close or restore the Preference section by c licking on the triangle on the main window right handle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-1 1 Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the m ain window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Preferences Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Changing the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic ef fect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group , c lick the horsesh oe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer â s desktop. Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the m onitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Y ou cannot adjust the sensor threshold values in a small monitoring panel.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-13 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This b ro ws er displays various Windows î management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser . CPU usage The CPU tab displays real- time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (b lue) and the available HDD space.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-15 Memory usage The Me mory tab sho ws both use d and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available physical ConîÂÂguring PC Probe II Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables y ou to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor thresho ld values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values f or each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch AI Gear , AI N.O.S., AI Booster , AI Nap, and Q-Fan utilities easily . Installing AI Suite T o install AI Suite on your computer: 1. Place the support CD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click AI Suite . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching AI Suite Y ou can launch the AI Suite right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the AI Suite from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx.xx . The AI Suite main window appears. After launching the application, the AI Suite icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using AI Suite Click the AI N.O.S., AI Gear , AI Nap, AI Booster , or Q-Fan icon to launch the utility , or click the Normal icon to restore the system to normal state. Press to launch AI Gear Press to launch AI Nap Pres s to la unch AI N.O.S. Press to launch Q-Fan Pr ess to l aun ch A I Bo ost er Press to restore to normal
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-17 Other feature buttons Click on right corner of the main window to open the monitor window . Click on right corner of the expanded window to switch the temperature from degrees Centigrade to degrees Fahrenheit. Displays the CPU/ system temperature, CPU/memory/PCIE voltage, and CPU/ chassis fan speed Displays the FSB/CPU frequency
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.4 ASUS AI Gear ASUS AI Gear provides four system performance options that allows you to select the best performance setting for your computing needs. This easy-to-use utility adjusts the processor frequency and vCore voltage to minimize system noise and power consumption. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch AI Gear by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on your Windows OS taskbar and then click the AI Gear button on the AI Suite main window . Shift the gear to the performance setting that you like. Maximum Performance Medium Performance High Performance Maximum Power Saving
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-19 5.3.5 ASUS AI Nap This feature allows you to minimize the power consumption of your computer whenever you are away . Enable this feature for minimum power consumption and a more quiet system operation. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI Nap button on the AI Suite main window . Click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o exit AI Nap mode, press the system power or mouse button then click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o switch the power button functions from AI Nap to shutting down, just right click the AI Suite icon on the OS taskbar , select AI Nap and click Use power button . Unclick the the item to switch the function back.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.6 ASUS AI N.O.S. This ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI N.O.S. button on the AI Suite main window . drop-down menu button select an N.O.S. mode Click the drop-down menu button and select Disable or Manual. Click Apply at the bottom to save the conîÂÂguration.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-21 5.3.7 ASUS Q-Fan This ASUS Q-Fan Control feature allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan or the Chassis Q-Fan for more efîÂÂcient system operation. After enabling the Q-Fan function, the fans can be set to automatically adjust depending on the temperature, to decrease fan speed, or to achieve the maximum fan speed. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the Q-Fan button on the AI Suite mAIn window . Click the drop-down menu button and display the fan names. Select CPU Q-F AN or CHASSIS Q-F AN . Click the box of Enable Q-Fan to activate this function. drop-down list button Enable Q-Fan box ProîÂÂle list appears after clicking the Enable Q-Fan box. Click the drop-down list button and select a proîÂÂle. Optimal mode makes the fans adjust speed with the temperature; Silent mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation; Performance mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect. click to display the drop-down list and select a Q-Fan mode Click Apply at the bottom to save the setup.
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.8 ASUS AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in WIndows î environment without the hassle of booting the BIOS. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support CD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the AI Booster button on the AI Suite main window . The options on the taskbar allow you to use the default settings, adjust CPU/ Memory/PCI-E frequency manually , or create and apply your personal overclocking conîÂÂgurations.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-23 5.3.9 SoundMAX î High DeîÂÂnition Audio utility The ADI AD1988 High DeîÂÂnition Audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability through the SoundMAX î audio utility with AudioESP⢠software to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software implements high quality audio synthesis/rendering, 3D sound positioning, and advanced voice-input technologies. Follow the installation wizard to install the ADI AD1988 Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package to activate the SoundMAX î audio utility . If the SoundMAX î audio utility is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the SoundMAX î icon on the taskbar . ⢠Y ou must use 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel speakers for this setup. ⢠SoundMAX î requires Microsoft î Windows î 2000/XP or later version. Make s ur e t h at o ne o f t h es e o p er at i ng s ys t em s i s i ns ta ll e d b e fo re i ns t al li n g SoundMAX î . ⢠Jack Retas king fu nction works on High Deî nition front panel au dio po rts only .
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundMAX î icon to display the SoundMAX î Control Panel. Audio Setup Wizard B y cl i ck i ng th e i co n f ro m t he So u nd M AX î c on t ro l p an e l, yo u c a n e a si l y conî gure you r a udio set tings. S imply fo llow suc ceeding screen instru ctions a nd begin enjoying High DeîÂÂnition Audio.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-25 Jack conîÂÂguration This screen helps you conîÂÂgure your computer â s audio ports, depending on the audio devices you have installed. Adjust speaker volume This screen helps you adjust speaker volume. Click the T est button to hear the changes you have made. Adjust microphone volume This screen helps you adjust microphone volume. Y ou will be asked to read pre- written text to allow the AudioWizard to adjust the volume as you speak.
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Audio preferences Click the icon to go to the Preferences page. This page allows you to change various audio settings. General options Click the General tab to choose your playback and recording devices, enable/ disable the AudioESP⢠feature, and enable/disable digital output. Listening Environment options Click the Listenin g Enviro nment tab to set up yo ur speaker , acoustic enviro nment, and enable/disable the Virtual Theater Surround function.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-27 Microphone options Click the Microphone tab allows you to optimize your microphone input settings.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with the following RAID resolutions: ⢠Intel î ICH8R Southbridge RAID controller that allow you to conîÂÂgure IDE and Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID 0, 1, 5, 10. ⢠JMicron î RAID controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. 5.4.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conîÂÂgured as a RAID set. This conîÂÂguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver an y advantage over using separ ate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneîÂÂts.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-29 5.4.3 Intel î RAID conîÂÂgurations T hi s mo th e rb oa rd su pp or t s R A ID 0 , R AI D 1 , J B OD a nd In te l î M at ri x S to ra ge c o n f i g u r a t i o n s f o r S e r i a l ATA h a r d d i s k s d r i v e s t h r o u g h t h e I n t e l î I C H 8 R Southbridge chip. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou mus t se t t he R AID i tem in th e BI OS Se tup bef ore y ou c an cr eat e a RAI D set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE ConîÂÂguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the item ConîÂÂgure SA T A As, then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RAID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to the system or the motherboard user guide for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5.4.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive . If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Intel î Matrix Storage. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH8R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Intel î Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-31 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-33 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 5. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create V olume menu.
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-35 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH8R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>.
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conîÂÂgure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size va lues range from 4 KB to 128 K B. The defa ult stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. Press <Enter> when the Create V olume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create V olume menu.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-37 5.4.4 JMicron î RAID ConîÂÂguration The JMicron î Serial A T A controller allows you to conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD sets on the external Serial A T A hard disk drives. Before creating a RAID set Prepare the following items: 1. T wo SA T A HDDs, preferably with the same model and capacity . 2. A write-enabled îÂÂoppy disk 3. Microsoft î Windows î OS installation disk (Windows 2000/XP) 4. Motherboard support CD with JMB363 driver Complete the following steps before you create a RAID set: 1. Install the external Serial A T A hard disk drives (HDDs) on your system. 2. Set the JMicron Controller Mode item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices ConîÂÂgurationâ for details. 3. Enter the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility to set up your RAID conîÂÂguration. 4. Create a JMB363 RAID driver disk for Windows î OS installation. See section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5. Install the JMB363 driver after the Windows î OS had been installed. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conî¿gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIE GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] JMicron SATA/PATA Controller [Enabled] JMicron SATA Controller Mode [SATA] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or Disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller Always install the JMB363 driver before creating RAID sets.
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Entering the JMB363 RAID BIOS utility 1. During POST , press <Ctrl-J> to enter the JBM363 RAID BIOS menu. J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 Co pyr igh t ( C) 2 00 4-2 005 J Mic ron T ech nol ogy h ttp :/ /ww w. j mic ron .c om HDD0 : HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1 : HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID Press <Ctrl-J> to enter RAID Setup Utility... 2. The main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu appears. 3. Use the arrow keys to move the color bar and navigate through the items. Creating a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Create RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [RAID Disk Drive List] [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-39 2. When the Level item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set that you want to create. 3. When the Disks item is highlighted, use the up/down arrow key to highlight an HDD that you want to belong to the RAID set, then press the space bar to conîÂÂrm selection. Repeat the process until the HDDs are selected. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 4. Key in the RAID volume capacity . Use the up/down arrow to choose the block size. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 1-Mirror Disks: Select Disk Block: N/A Size : 159 GB Conî¿rm Creation [Hard Disk Drive List] Model Name Capacity Type/Status HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 XXX GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 XXX GB Non-RAID [Create New RAID] Name : JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 5. When done, press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm the creation of the RA ID set. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. 6. The following screen appears, displaying the relevant information about the RAID set you created. [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el N a me R A ID Le ve l Ca pa ci t y S ta tu s M e mb er s( H D D x) RDD0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Available Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB Non-RAID HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB Non-RAID [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [RAID Disk Drive List] [Create New RAID] Name: JRAID Level: 0-Stripe Disks: Select Disk Block: 128 KB Size : 319 GB Conî¿rm Creation CONFIRM RAID CREATION ALL DATA ON THE SELECTED HARD DISK WILL BE LOST WHEN EXIT WITH SAVING Create RAID on the selected HDD (Y/N)? Y
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-41 Deleting a RAID set 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Delete RAID Disk Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the RAID set you want to delete. A selected set shows a sign before it. Press the <Del> key to delete the set. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDDs. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB RAID Inside HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) R DD 0: JRAID 0-Stripe XXX GB Normal 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving ALL DATA ON THE RAID WILL BE LOST!! ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE (Y/N)? Y [ TAB]-Switch Window [ âÂÂâ ]-Select Item [ENTER]-Action [ESC]-Exit
5-42 Chapter 5: Software support Resetting disks to non-RAID T o reset disks to non-RAID: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Revert HDD to non-RAID using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to reset to non-RAID. A selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Pressing <Y> deletes all the data in the HDD. An HDD that has been previously conîÂÂgured as part of another RAID set in another platform is called a broken RAID HDD. When you install a broken RAID HDD, you cannot select this HDD when conîÂÂguring a RAID set through the JMB363 utility . If you still want to use this broken RAID HDD as part of the RAID set conîÂÂgured through the JMB363, you may do so by resetting the disk to non-RAID. Y ou will, however , lose all data and previous RAID conîÂÂgurations.
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-43 T o solve a Mirror conîÂÂict: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. 2. Use the space bar to select the HDD that you want to set as source drive. The selected HDD shows a sign before it. 3. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB R AI D I ns i de HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait... Solving a Mirror conîÂÂict A Mirror conîÂÂict occurs when both disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration are unplugged from the system in turn, then plugged in again. Since both disks contain exactly the same data, the system will be unable to determine which of the two is the source drive. This option allows you to set the source drive and rebuild the Mirror drive according to the contents of the source drive.
5-44 Chapter 5: Software support Saving the settings and exiting setup When you have îÂÂnished, highlight Save & Exit Setup using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter> to save the current RAID conîÂÂguration and exit the J MB363 RAID BOS utility . A dialogue box appears to conîÂÂrm the action. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N> to return to the JMB RAID BIOS menu. T o rebuild a Mirror drive: 1. In the main JMB363 RAID BIOS menu, highlight Rebuild Mirror Drive using the up/down arrow key then press <Enter>. [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding a Mirror Drive When one of the disks in a RAID 1 (Mirror) conîÂÂguration is unplugged from the system, then plugged in again, a dialogue box appears to ask you to rebuild the Mirror drive. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm; otherwise, press <N>. This option allows you to rebuild the Mirror drive later and synchronize the data between two hard disks. 2. Using the <T AB>, move to the RAID Disk Drive List menu and highlight the RAID set that you want to rebuild. Press <Del> to begin rebuilding the Mirror conîÂÂguration. A status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the progress of the rebuilding. J M i c r on T e c h n o l o g y C o r p . P C I - t o -S A T A I I / I D E R A I D C o n t r o l l e r B I O S v 0 . 9 7 [Hard Disk Drive List] Mod el Na me Cap aci ty Typ e/S tat us HDD0: HDS722516VLSA80 164 GB R AI D I ns i de HDD1: HDS722516DLA380 164 GB RAID Inside [RAID Disk Drive List] M od el Na me RA ID L ev el C ap ac it y S ta t us M em be rs (H DD x) RDD0: JRAID 1-Mirror XXX GB Rebuild 01 [Main Menu] Create RAID Disk Drive Delete RAID Disk Drive Revert HDD to Non-RAID Solve Mirror ConîÂÂict Rebuild Mirror Drive Save and Exit Setup Exit Without Saving Rebuilding... 01%, please wait...
ASUS P5B-E Plus 5-45 5.5.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î : 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support CD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then click Intel ICH8R 32/64 bit RAID Driver Disk to create an Intel î ICH8R RAID driver disk or the Make JMicron JMB36X 32/64-bit RAID Driver to create a JMicron î JMB363 RAID driver disk. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP and later operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. 5.5.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS: 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support CD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process.
5-46 Chapter 5: Software support T o install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the <F6> key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Press <F6> then insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, make sure you select Intel(R) 82801GH/GM SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH8R) and JMicron JMB363 . 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
A CPU features The Appendix describ es the CPU features and technologies that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5B-E Plus Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-3
ASUS P5B-E Plus A-1 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit www .mi cro sof t.c om fo r mo re inf orm atio n o n W ind ows î 64-bit OS. Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . Refe r to t he expa nsion card or add-o n devi ce(s ) docu mentati on, or visit the rela ted we bsite, to ver ify if the ca rd/dev ice suppor ts a 64 -bit s ystem. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠In tel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. T urn on the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu , highlight CPU ConîÂÂguration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-23 for details. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Properties window . 8. On the Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On . 9. Click Apply , then click OK . 10. Close the Display Properties window . After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low . The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5B-E Plus A-3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hy per -Thr ead ing Te chn ol ogy is sup por ted und er Win dow s î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www.intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu , make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to [Enabled]. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper- Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-4 Appendix: CPU features